Installation Manual Artist

Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA
Artist
Installation Manual
5670002
Revision 14.0
© 2010-2020 General Electric Company
All rights reserved.
Language Policy
Direction 2128126 - Language Policy For Service Documentation
ПРЕДУПРЕЖ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

ДЕНИЕ • Ако доставчикът на услугата на клиента изиска друг език, задължение на клиента е
(BG) да осигури превод.
• Не използвайте оборудването, преди да сте се консултирали и разбрали упътването
за работа.
• Неспазването на това предупреждение може да доведе до нараняване на
доставчика на услугата, оператора или пациентa в резултат на токов удар,
механична или друга опасност.
警告本维修手册仅提供英文版本。
(ZH-CN) • 如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本，则客户需自行提供翻译服务。
• 未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前，不得进行维修。
• 忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员、操作人员或患者造成电击、机械伤害或其他形式的
伤害。
警告本服務手冊僅提供英文版本。
(ZH-HK) • 倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊，客戶有責任提供翻譯服務。
• 除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容，否則切勿嘗試維修設備。
• 不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商、網絡供應商或病人受到觸電、機械性或其他的危
險。
警告本維修手冊僅有英文版。
(ZH-TW) • 若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言，應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務。
• 請勿試圖維修本設備，除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊。
• 若未留意本警告，可能導致維修廠商、操作員或病患因觸電、機械或其他危險而受
傷。
UPOZOR- Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

ENJE • Ako davatelj usluge klijenta treba neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan osigurati prijevod.
(HR) • Ne pokušavajte servisirati opremu ako niste u potpunosti pročitali i razumjeli ovaj servisni
priručnik.
• Zanemarite li ovo upozorenje, može doći do ozljede davatelja usluge, operatera ili pacijenta
uslijed strujnog udara, mehaničkih ili drugih rizika.
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist i
VÝSTRAHA Tento provozní návod existuje pouze v anglickém jazyce.
(CS) • V případě, že externí služba zákazníkům potřebuje návod v jiném jazyce, je zajištění překla-
du do odpovídajícího jazyka úkolem zákazníka.
• Nesnažte se o údržbu tohoto zařízení, aniž byste si přečetli tento provozní návod a pochopi-
li jeho obsah.
• V případě nedodržování této výstrahy může dojít k poranění pracovníka prodejního servisu,
obslužného personálu nebo pacientů vlivem elektrického proudu, respektive vlivem me-
chanických či jiných rizik.
ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

(DA) • Hvis en kundes tekniker har brug for et andet sprog end engelsk, er det kundens ansvar at
sørge for oversættelse.
• Forsøg ikke at servicere udstyret uden at læse og forstå denne servicemanual.
• Manglende overholdelse af denne advarsel kan medføre skade på grund af elektrisk stød,
mekanisk eller anden fare for teknikeren, operatøren eller patienten.
WAAR- Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

SCHUWING • Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist, dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor
(NL) de vertaling ervan.
• Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd
geraadpleegd en begrepen is.
• Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd, zou het onderhoudspersoneel, de opera-
tor of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok, mechanische
of andere gevaren.
WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

(EN) • If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's
responsibility to provide translation services.
• Do not attempt to service the equipment unless this service manual has been consulted
and is understood.
• Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient
from electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

(ET) • Kui klienditeeninduse osutaja nõuab juhendit inglise keelest erinevas keeles, vastutab
klient tõlketeenuse osutamise eest.
• Ärge üritage seadmeid teenindada enne eelnevalt käesoleva teenindusjuhendiga tutvumist
ja sellest aru saamist.
• Käesoleva hoiatuse eiramine võib põhjustada teenuseosutaja, operaatori või patsiendi vig-
astamist elektrilöögi, mehaanilise või muu ohu tagajärjel.
ii Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
VAROITUS Tämä huolto-ohje on saatavilla vain englanniksi.
(FI) • Jos asiakkaan huoltohenkilöstö vaatii muuta kuin englanninkielistä materiaalia, tarvittavan
käännöksen hankkiminen on asiakkaan vastuulla.
• Älä yritä korjata laitteistoa ennen kuin olet varmasti lukenut ja ymmärtänyt tämän huolto-
ohjeen.
• Mikäli tätä varoitusta ei noudateta, seurauksena voi olla huoltohenkilöstön, laitteiston käyt-
täjän tai potilaan vahingoittuminen sähköiskun, mekaanisen vian tai muun vaaratilanteen
vuoksi.
ATTENTION Ce manuel d'installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

(FR) • Si le technicien d'un client a besoin de ce manuel dans une langue autre que l'anglais, il in-
combe au client de le faire traduire.
• Ne pas tenter d'intervenir sur les équipements tant que ce manuel d'installation et de
maintenance n'a pas été consulté et compris.
• Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le pa-
tient des blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

(DE) • Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden
für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
• Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten, ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und ver-
standen zu haben.
• Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnik-
ers, des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Ge-
fahren kommen.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟ Τοπαρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

ΙΗΣΗ • Εάν το άτομο παροχής σέρβις ενός πελάτη απαιτεί το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σε γλώσσα εκτός
(EL) των αγγλικών, αποτελεί ευθύνη του πελάτη να παρέχει υπηρεσίες μετάφρασης.
• Μηνεπιχειρήσετε την εκτέλεση εργασιών σέρβις στον εξοπλισμό εκτός εάν έχετε
συμβουλευτεί και έχετε κατανοήσει το παρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις.
• Εάν δεν λάβετε υπόψη την προειδοποίηση αυτή, ενδέχεται να προκληθεί τραυματισμός
στο άτομο παροχής σέρβις, στο χειριστή ή στον ασθενή από ηλεκτροπληξία, μηχανικούς
ή άλλους κινδύνους.
FIGYELMEZ- Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

TETÉS • Ha a vevő szolgáltatója angoltól eltérő nyelvre tart igényt, akkor a vevő felelőssége a fordí-
(HU) tás elkészíttetése.
• Ne próbálja elkezdeni használni a berendezést, amíg a karbantartási kézikönyvben leírtakat
nem értelmezték.
• Ezen figyelmeztetés figyelmen kívül hagyása a szolgáltató, működtető vagy a beteg ára-
mütés, mechanikai vagy egyéb veszélyhelyzet miatti sérülését eredményezheti.
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist iii
AÐVÖRUN Þessi þjónustuhandbók er aðeins fáanleg á ensku.
(IS) • Ef að þjónustuveitandi viðskiptamanns þarfnast annas tungumáls en ensku, er það skylda
viðskiptamanns að skaffa tungumálaþjónustu.
• Reynið ekki að afgreiða tækið nema að þessi þjónustuhandbók hefur verið skoðuð og skilin.
• Brot á sinna þessari aðvörun getur leitt til meiðsla á þjónustuveitanda, stjórnanda eða sjú-
klings frá raflosti, vélrænu eða öðrum áhættum.
AVVERTEN- Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

ZA • Se un addetto alla manutenzione richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenu-
(IT) to a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
• Procedere alla manutenzione dell'apparecchiatura solo dopo aver consultato il presente
manuale ed averne compreso il contenuto.
• Il mancato rispetto della presente avvertenza potrebbe causare lesioni all'addetto alla man-
utenzione, all'operatore o ai pazienti provocate da scosse elettriche, urti meccanici o altri
rischi.
警告このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありません。
(JA) • サービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合、翻訳作業はその業
者の責任で行うものとさせていただきます。
• このサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに、装置のサービスを行わないでくださ
い。
• この警告に従わない場合、サービスを担当される方、操作員あるいは患者さんが、
感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります。
경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.

(KO) • 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우, 번역 서비스를 제공하는 것
은 고객의 책임입니다.
• 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하려고 시도하지 마
십시오.
• 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크, 기계적 위험, 또는 기타 위험으로 인해 서비
스 제공자, 사용자 또는 환자에게 부상을 입힐 수 있습니다.
BRĪDINĀ- Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

JUMS • Ja klienta apkopes sniedzējam nepieciešama informācija citā valodā, klienta pienākums ir
(LV) nodrošināt tulkojumu.
• Neveiciet aprīkojuma apkopi bez apkopes rokasgrāmatas izlasīšanas un saprašanas.
• Šī brīdinājuma neievērošanas rezultātā var rasties elektriskās strāvas trieciena, mehānisku
vai citu faktoru izraisītu traumu risks apkopes sniedzējam, operatoram vai pacientam.
iv Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
ĮSPĖJIMAS Šis eksploatavimo vadovas yra tik anglų kalba.
(LT) • Jei kliento paslaugų tiekėjas reikalauja vadovo kita kalba – ne anglų, suteikti vertimo pas-
laugas privalo klientas.
• Nemėginkite atlikti įrangos techninės priežiūros, jei neperskaitėte ar nesupratote šio eks-
ploatavimo vadovo.
• Jei nepaisysite šio įspėjimo, galimi paslaugų tiekėjo, operatoriaus ar paciento sužalojimai
dėl elektros šoko, mechaninių ar kitų pavojų.
ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

(NO) • Hvis kundens serviceleverandør har bruk for et annet språk, er det kundens ansvar å sørge
for oversettelse.
• Ikke forsøk å reparere utstyret uten at denne servicehåndboken er lest og forstått.
• Manglende hensyn til denne advarselen kan føre til at serviceleverandøren, operatøren eller
pasienten skades på grunn av elektrisk støt, mekaniske eller andre farer.
OSTRZEŻE- Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

NIE • Jeśli serwisant klienta wymaga języka innego niż angielski, zapewnienie usługi tłumaczenia
(PL) jest obowiązkiem klienta.
• Nie próbować serwisować urządzenia bez zapoznania się z niniejszym podręcznikiem ser-
wisowym i zrozumienia go.
• Niezastosowanie się do tego ostrzeżenia może doprowadzić do obrażeń serwisanta, opera-
tora lub pacjenta w wyniku porażenia prądem elektrycznym, zagrożenia mechanicznego
bądź innego.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

(PT-BR) • Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual, caberá ao cliente
fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de as-
sistência técnica.
• A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico, operador ou paciente
decorrentes de choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

(PT-PT) • Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar este manual noutro idioma, é da
responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
• Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de as-
sistência técnica.
• O não cumprimento deste aviso pode colocar em perigo a segurança do técnico, do opera-
dor ou do paciente devido a choques eléctricos, mecânicos ou outros.
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist v
ATENŢIE Acest manual de service este disponibil doar în limba engleză.
(RO) • Dacă un furnizor de servicii pentru clienţi necesită o altă limbă decât cea engleză, este de
datoria clientului să furnizeze o traducere.
• Nu încercaţi să reparaţi echipamentul decât ulterior consultării şi înţelegerii acestui manual
de service.
• Ignorarea acestui avertisment ar putea duce la rănirea depanatorului, operatorului sau pa-
cientului în urma pericolelor de electrocutare, mecanice sau de altă natură.
ОСТОРОЖН Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском

О! языке.
(RU) • Если сервисному персоналу клиента необходимо руководство не на английском, а на
каком-то другом языке, клиенту следует самостоятельно обеспечить перевод.
• Перед техническим обслуживанием оборудования обязательно обратитесь к
данному руководству и поймите изложенные в нем сведения.
• Несоблюдение требований данного предупреждения может привести к тому, что
специалист по техобслуживанию, оператор или пациент получит удар электрическим
током, механическую травму или другое повреждение.
UPOZOR- Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

ENJE • Ako klijentov serviser zahteva neki drugi jezik, klijent je dužan da obezbedi prevodilačke usl-
(SR) uge.
• Ne pokušavajte da opravite uređaj ako niste pročitali i razumeli ovo servisno uputstvo.
• Zanemarivanje ovog upozorenja može dovesti do povređivanja servisera, rukovaoca ili paci-
jenta usled strujnog udara ili mehaničkih i drugih opasnosti.
UPOZORNE- Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

NIE • Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu, poskytnutie preklada-
(SK) teľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka.
• Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia, kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete
mu.
• Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb, obsluhujúcej
osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom, mechanické alebo iné ohrozenie.
ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

(ES) • Si el encargado de mantenimiento de un cliente necesita un idioma que no sea el inglés, el
cliente deberá encargarse de la traducción del manual.
• No se deberá dar servicio técnico al equipo, sin haber consultado y comprendido este man-
ual de servicio.
• La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el
operador o el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de
otra naturaleza.
vi Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
VARNING Den här servicehandboken finns bara tillgänglig på engelska.
(SV) • Om en kunds servicetekniker har behov av ett annat språk än engelska, ansvarar kunden
för att tillhandahålla översättningstjänster.
• Försök inte utföra service på utrustningen om du inte har läst och förstår den här service-
handboken.
• Om du inte tar hänsyn till den här varningen kan det resultera i skador på serviceteknikern,
operatören eller patienten till följd av elektriska stötar, mekaniska faror eller andra faror.
OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

(SL) • Če ponudnik storitve stranke potrebuje priročnik v drugem jeziku, mora stranka zagotoviti
prevod.
• Ne poskušajte servisirati opreme, če tega priročnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli.
• Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate, se lahko zaradi električnega udara, mehanskih ali drugih
nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev, operater ali bolnik.
DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

(TR) • Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse, bunu
tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer.
• Servis kılavuzunu okuyup anlamadan ekipmanlara müdahale etmeyiniz.
• Bu uyarıya uyulmaması, elektrik, mekanik veya diğer tehlikelerden dolayı teknisyen, opera-
tör veya hastanın yaralanmasına yol açabilir.
ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕ Даний посібник з експлуатації доступний тільки англійською мовою.

ННЯ • Якщо постачальник послуг клієнта спілкується іноземною мовою, тоді клієнт
(UK) зобов'язаний забезпечити переклад.
• Заборонено проводити огляд обладнання без попереднього звертання до даного
посібника з експлуатації і розуміння інформації, поданої у ньому.
• Недотримання цього застереження може завдати шкоди здоров’ю постачальника
послуг, оператора або пацієнта через ураження електричним струмом, механічну
травму або інше ушкодження.
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist vii
Revision History
Managed as DOC0962146.
viii Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
Revisio Date Description
n
1.0 February 2, 2010 For review approval and validation of this document. See information below.
• DOC 0666573, rev 1, review and approval.
• DOC 0666573, rev 2, for validation
• DOC 0666573, rev 3, for re-validation based on SPR's: Cable map updates
(MRIhc46698). E-Off update (MRIhc47230). Update illustrations for new Teal
MDP (MRIhc47445). Revise connection point of gradient cable ground wires
at rear of magnet (MRIhc47442). I Provide instructions for installation of don-
gle to SRPS J50 (MRIhc47443). Rear pedestal installation procedure updates
(MRIhc46657). Update installation instructions for enclosure covers shipping
separately (ECO2097330).
2.0 September 13, In table 1-1, removed magnet relative humidity and atmospheric pressure infor-
2010 mation and replaced with n/a, (not applicable) (MRIhc46642). Revised installation
flow chart to reflect changes to respective sections in manual. Updated illustra-
tions throughout manual to show 450w product (MRIhc49463). Added note to
save cabinet shipping brackets for seismic anchoring (MRIhc49004). Added in-
struction for installing SRPS J50 Dongle to rear of SRPS module prior to installing
PEN cabinet (MRIhc47443 & MRIhc49340). Added view of new PDU that does not
require DIP switch setting (ECO 2090162). On cable maps, added note for fiber op-
tic connections (MRIhc51560, MRIhc51563). Corrected run numbers connected to
DDSPLIT (MRIhc51353). Revised cable map errors (MRIhc52352, MRIhc51538). Re-
moved IRD fiber optic cable on LED cable maps (MRIhc48761). Removed Runs
M1311, M1341 & M1342 from equipment room cable tray (MRIhc48837 &
MRIhc50338). Removed Run M3307 (MRIhc51535). Added (32 ch) information to
Run P2004 (MRIhc50338) and removed from 16 channel cable maps (MRIhc49462,
MRIhc50341, & MRIhc50680). Revised cable tray width illustration (MRIhc50338).
Added alternateviews of overhead cable trays in stacked positions (MRIhc52726).
Clarified left/right viewing of end of cable tray (MRIhc50340). Removed section
pertaining to removal of enclosure covers (MRIhc49454). Added instruction for
gradient cables to be in a single layer (MRIhc48840 & MRIhc50342). Added note
for correct placement of gradient cable lockwasher (MRIhc48789, MRIhc48339, &
MRIhc49339). Corrected order of gradient cable connection to SPW in illustration
4-16 (MRIhc49455). Clarified initial positioning of rear pedestal (MRIhc49464).
Added instruction for attaching air hoses to rear end bell before attaching rear
pedestal (MRIhc50450). Added step for connecting PGR ground to RF common
ground (MRIhc48937). Added note for connecting E4007 to alternate ground stud
(MRIhc48936 & MRIhc48938). Updated illustrations pertaining to connecting ho-
ses to the newest version of the HEC (ECO 2100354). Added minimum floor clear-
ance of dock bracket when installing dock (MRIhc50226). Added note for alternate
method of installing Blower Box (MRIhc48792). Added instruction to refer to Di-
rection 500097 for installing cryo-compressor cooling hoses (MRIhc49003). Upda-
ted air and water hose schematic (MRIhc49457, MRIhc49678, MRIhc50541). Add-
ed instruction that final position of 1.5 inch hoses will be under bridge
(MRIhc48810). Added note for applying insulation before routing in cable trays
(MRIhc49667). Added Important Note to not apply cork/rubber wrap until after
leak check (MRIhc48856). Added steps for installing insulation sleeves on 1.5 and
4 inch hoses and the gray, yellow, black, blue, green and red hoses (MRIhc49457,
MRIhc49678, & MRIhc50341). Clarified location of Air Y-fitting on cable tray
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist ix
(continued)
n
(MRIhc50341). Added to instruction for applying teflon tape to fittings connecting

to cryo-cooler (MRIhc49318). Reversed steps for installing left and right front cov-
ers (MRIhc49460). Updated illustration 4-61 of dock left side cable bracket
(MRihc49461). Revised LED Display installation (MRIhc49459). Added information
for attaching cables to I/O panel at top of magnet )MRIhc50683). Added routing
and connection of Run 1001 to hybrid splitter at rear of magnet (MRIhc49455). Re-
vised attachment of skirt covers. Revised the tie-wrapping of cables at rear of
magnet and added more cable information (MRIhc48837 & MRIhc49455). Added
connections of Runs M1305 and M1306 (MRIhc49455). Revised photo for rear end
of magnet (MRIhc50690). Added info for making sure that 8w8 cables at rear ped
do not get routed near antenna (MRIhc52329). Added note for minimum fiber op-
tic cable bend radius (MRIhc49402, MRIhc49366). Corrected fastener information
for mounting rear pedestal bracket (MRIhc49464, MRIhc50447). Updated illustra-
tion for I and Q cable insulation (MRIhc49455). Added Reed Switch installation
(MRIhc48850). Removed Runs 1341, 1342 and 331 connecting to PEN Panel
(MRIhc50388 and MRIhc50389). Corrected fastener size for attaching rear enclo-
sure covers (MRIhc48857). Added instruction for installing vacuum port
(MRIhc49469). Corrected fastener information for attaching skirt covers
(MRIhc48857). Added instruction for installing cable curtains in magnet room
(MRIhc48838). Added note that all table covers must be in place after all tests are
complete (MRIhc49624). Added fastener information for attaching rear pedestal
bumpers and covers (MRIhc49472). Added view of New Z400 computer for cable
connections (G60002DA). Corrected connection of cable connection to J1 of F/O
converter box (MRIhc49338). Updated cable specification table with minimum
bend radii for all cables (MRIhc50339).
3.0 June 15, 2011 Updated manual to include installation procedures for new MR450w GEM prod-
uct. Chapter 4: Updated cable maps for inclusion of PAC5 module and updated
Run M3360 cable. Section 4-28: Updated MAG PAC connection designator (ECO
2112564). SPW Cables Section: Updated SPW cable connection panel by adding
J200, J201, J202, J203, J204, and J205 (ECO 2111555).
4.0 July 20, 2012 Updated manual as required per HD VCP to add information on XGD2 Gradient
Amplifier (ECO 2128543), eSRPS Filter Box (ECO 2128544), and ePDB Assembly
(ECO 2128757). Chapter 2: Removed errant rectangle on HEC illustration
(HCSDM00078549). Chapter 4: Revised cable map by removing Runs 1325 and
1326 references (HCSDM00117375). Revised cable map air hose to rear ped from
2” to 1.5” (HCSDM00079663). Added PGR iButton install option. Reaffirmed that
note was added for applying insulation before routing in cable trays in rev 2
(HCSDM00079713). Reaffirmed that Nordlock washer installation instructions
were added in previous revision (HCSDM0007967). Changed magnet top beam L-
bracket fastener from 110mm long to 80mm long (ECO 2122240).
x Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
(continued)
n
5.0 April 19, 2013 Chapter 1, Section 1.2: Added Caution for dock anchor stud trip hazard
(HCSDM00167937). Chapter 2, Section 1.8: Updated screw size from M5 x 12mm
to M5 x 16MM (HCSDM00078593). Chapter 4, Section 2: Corrected magnet moni-
tor cable connection labels at terminal box on magnet (HCSDM00078613 &
HCSDM00080119). Chapter 4, Section 11: Added note to not remove insulation on
I & Q cables at rear of magnet (HCSDM00078625). Chapter 4, Section 23: Added
step for checking height of dock anchor stud (HCSDM00167937).
6.0 May 28, 2014 Chapter 7: Updated the PC cable connection section. Added z420 PC and removed
XW8400 PC. (DV25 product)
7.0 November Chapter 6: Added Section 2.12, Cable Management Kit. Chapter 7, Section 1.5.4:
11,2014 Revised the step for connecting ethernet to PC. It must be connected to the
RIGHT side port on the back of the z420 computer.
8.0 September 12, Added SMART installation pages.

2016
9.0 January 5, 2017 Added cable maps for DV26 systems with ICE and USB hub. Chapter 1: Moved
SMART installation content into Chapter 1. Chapter 2: Added lean cart informa-
tion. Chapter 4, Section 27.2: Added fiber optic cable map for system with ICE.
Chapter 6, Section 1.6.3: Added Dell T5810 cable connection procedure.
10.0 June 30, 2017 Added installation content for SIGNA Artist systems. Chapter 2: Added lean cart
and staging information. Added Grafidy and MCRV to tools and equipment list.
Added grounding check to be done by customer supplied licensed electrician.
Chapter 5: Added note for routing orange cryogen line. Added Warning about laser
radiation that can be emitted from disconnected fiber-optic cables. Added Notice
to observe electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions. Added Notice about SFP op-
tical tranceiver and SFP Loopback sensitivity, and precautions to observe. Added
details for M2025-D remaining disconnected for Artist and Artist XT. Updated ca-
ble maps to indicate that GOC hub is not included in newer GOCs. Added magnet
gradient cable torque. Chapter 8: Removed Brainwave option connections from
Host PC. Added notes and instructions for newer GOCs which do not include the
8-port Ethernet hub. Chapter 9: Added step to indicate prestaged software and
calibration information. Appendix A: Updated bend radius for fiber optic cables.
11.0 January 31, Chapter 1: Removed reference to separate FRU and magnet delivery manuals.
2018 Added notes for staged system calibrations. Chapter 2: Revised gradient cable
tool kit in the installation equipment table. Updated GOC staging and preinstalled
software information. Added grounding check to be done by customer supplied li-
censed electrician. Chapter 5: Revised tools and methods for crimping gradient
cables. Added note for routing orange cryogen line. Revised connection instruc-
tions for M3392 and M3316 at the MEMS cable management panel. Updated Ta-
ble Interface Cable connection to Rx Distribution J57, and added new illustrations
for Rx Distribution and Table Interface Cable. Chapter 6: Referred to FRU manual
for PA coil part numbers. Revised PA coil instructions for foam filler. Chapter 7:
Added notes and instructions for newer GOCs which do not include the 8-port
Ethernet hub. Chapter 9: Added instructions for gradient cable inspection require-
ments. Appendix: Changed X and Y gradient cables to 1 AWG.
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist xi
(continued)
n
12.0 September 24, Chapter 2: Added non-magnetic torque wrench kit. Added gradient cable stripper
2018 and crimper tools. Chapter 5: Updated magnet gradient cable installation instruc-
tions. Added note for hydraulic crimping tool. Added gradient cable lug torque to
busbar. Chapter 8: Added LCD monitor power cable adapter.
13.0 November 7, Chapter 2 is added for Smart installation for IPM magnet. Chapter 6: Added cable
2019 map for SIGNA Artist. Chapter 8: Added the sections about middle right side cover
bracket and enclosure lower cover brackets for IPM Magnet.
14.0 July 15, 2020 Chapter 6: Correct the part number 5337932-3 for IPM magnet. Update Magnet
I/O cable connections.
Chapters 6, 7, and 8: Updated hardware and added required hardware tables.
Chapter 10, Section 10.2.2:
• Added step to do the Emergency Off Connection Safety check.
• Added step to execute the e-Installation form (DOC1685408) and submit it
to the e-forms repository.
IDENTIFIER LOC ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING RATE NOTES

METHOD
EC01 Chapter 6 Cable and According to Up- NA NA

System Installation, grade manual up-
section 6.27 Bridge date, FE must follow
and rear pedestal procedure to oper-
installation ate it.
EC02 Chapter 8 Final En- According to Up- NA NA

closure Installation grade manual up-
for MR450w GEM date, FE must follow
and Artist Systems, procedure to oper-
section 8.2.4 Instal- ate it.
lation of front cov-
ers
xii Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
Contents
Chapter 1 SMART Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 SMART installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 SMART installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.4 Site readiness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.5 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6 Magnet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
1.7 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
1.8 Mechanical installation (day 1-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.9 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
1.10 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
1.11 Adjustments and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.12 System calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Chapter 2 SMART Installation for IPM Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 SMART Installation Overview for IPM Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
2.2 Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2.3 Site readiness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
2.4 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
2.5 Magnet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.6 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
2.7 Mechanical installation (day 1-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
2.8 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
2.9 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
2.10 Adjustments and calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2.11 System calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Chapter 3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.1 Overview Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
3.2 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
3.2.1 LOTO prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
3.2.2 Applying LOTO to PGR cabinet PDU on MDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.2.3 LOTO for Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.2.4 Removing LOTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
3.3 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist xiii
3.4 Installation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
3.4.1 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
3.4.2 System start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Chapter 4 Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

4.1 Cabinet positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Chapter 5 PGR Cabinet PDU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

5.1 PGR/PDU setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Chapter 6 Cable and System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

6.1 Overview of system components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
6.2 Cable map interconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
6.3 Sorting and routing cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.4 Storage of excess cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.5 Rear magnet enclosure cable cover test-fit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.6 Cable locations in equipment room overhead cable trays . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.7 Cable locations in magnet room overhead cable trays . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.8 Cryogen line positioning on magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.9 Gradient cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.9.1 SPW L-bracket replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.9.2 Equipment room gradient cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.9.3 Magnet room gradient cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run M4005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.11 Position rear pedestal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.12 RF transmit cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.13 Route and connect ground cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.14 Route and connect equipment room power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.15 Route and connect equipment room data cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.16 Install temperature/humidity sensor components in equipment room . . . . . . . 176
6.17 Install RF door switch Run E3014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
6.18 Install blower box on penetration panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.19 Install air and water hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.20 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - GEM style enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 194
6.21 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - MR450w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.22 LED display installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.23 Dock installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
6.24 Route and connect cables in magnet room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
xiv Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
6.25 Install fiber optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.25.1 Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XGD . . . . . . . 232
6.25.2 Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XG2 . . . . . . . 240
6.25.3 Magnet room fiber optic installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
6.26 Pneumatic patient alert installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.26.1 Magnet room routing of pneumatic tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.26.2 Determining need of extender box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6.26.3 Installation of Extender Kit 46-317758P2 (if required) . . . . . . . . . . 251
6.26.4 Control box installation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
6.26.5 Control box installation on wall or under shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
6.26.6 Control box mounted with Velcro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
6.26.7 Installing control box with mounting screws on vertical surface . . . . . . . 255
6.26.8 Installing control box with mounting screws under shelf . . . . . . . . . 256
6.26.9 Final connections to control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.26.10 Squeeze bulb installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6.27 Bridge and rear pedestal installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.28 LPCA installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.29 SRI connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.30 Emergency off connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.31 Route and connect Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6.32 Route and connect penetration panel cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.33 Installation of magnet enclosure rear covers for MR450w . . . . . . . . . . . 278
6.34 Coil and dress cable in penetration panel closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Chapter 7 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

7.1 Install Enclosure Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
7.2 Install Cable Curtain at Top of Magnet (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7.2.2 Installation of Cable Curtain (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.3 Install Laser Alignment Light Warning Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.4 Patient Transport Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Chapter 8 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w GEM and Artist Systems . . . . 295
8.1 Installation of enclosure cover brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.2 Installation of enclosure covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
8.3 Cable Concealment Kit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
8.4 PA coil installation in patient table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.4.2 Preliminary requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.4.3 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist xv
8.4.4 Finalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Chapter 9 Operator Workspace Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

9.1 Operator workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
9.1.1 Operator workspace table anchor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
9.1.2 GOC installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
9.1.3 Computer cabinet cable routing and connections. . . . . . . . . . . . 339
9.1.4 GOC cabinet cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
9.1.5 GOC cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
9.1.6 Install modem cable to GOC cabinet (if applicable) . . . . . . . . . . . 351
9.1.7 Restore GOC covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
9.1.8 Install temperature and humidity sensor on GOC . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
9.1.9 Install monitor, and SCIM and keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
9.1.10 Final positioning of GOC cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
9.1.11 Power on information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 10 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

10.1 Completion checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
10.2 GE Field Engineer responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Chapter 11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

11.1 Cable specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
xvi Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
SMART Installation
Chapter 1 SMART Installation
1.1 SMART installation

1.1.1 SMART definition and site readiness
SMART is a system installation methodology that was developed through best practices of MR
installations, having received positive feedback from many GE Customers. It promotes having the
Customer, the GE Healthcare Project Manager (PMI) and the Field Service Engineer (FSE) working as a
connected team throughout the installation project. With SMART, the GE Project Manager explains to
the Customer up front that GE will commit to a product installation applied time of 10-14 business days
from magnet delivery through calibration/clean-up for customer use. Application training can be
scheduled to a committed date immediately following completion of SMART.
SMART relies on transparent planning and good up-front execution to be successful. There are multiple
enablers to achieve desired results with SMART:
• Project coordination with high transparency among customer, PMI and FSE which includes full
understanding of roles and responsibilities among general contractor, RF shield vendor and rigging
team to maintain the planned project schedule.
• Site readiness process execution with high quality
• Field service tasks - knowledge of and expectations
• SMART install timeline execution with high rigor
1.1.2 Project coordination

• Customer and GE Project Manager agree to the specific construction on time and include
communications with:
• General Contractor (GC)
• RF shield vendor
• Rigging team
• GE project manager and the primary field engineer plan a schedule to deliver:
• Pre-magnet shipping collector – for GC to install and provide power and water
• Schedule cryogens and all necessary service tools
• Schedule magnet / equipment delivery
• Schedule and define work for system installation
5670002 Revision 14.0 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 1
SMART Installation
1.1.3 Site readiness process
Site readiness to enable SMART requires:

• Magnet room construction complete including ceiling, lighting, cable trays, mill work, storage
cabinets and paint (exception is the magnet delivery path).
• Equipment room requires MDP installed, power supplied to MDP from facility, LOTO applied, HEC
installed, plumbed with by-pass, water flushed, power supplied to HEC from MDP, shut down to
receive coolant without fear of flooding the site.
• Operator room completion no later than start of day 3 mechanical install
1.1.4 Field service tasks

The FSE understands SMART is used to define a process for ALL tasks needed for Product installation
and calibration. The person performing the tasks knows what needs to be complete, they know the
interdependencies to include:
• A full understanding of all tasks to complete for system transfer
• Adjust the work flow to the site conditions:
• Room construction not complete is any given room
• Finished work due to magnet delivery independent of which wall/ceiling the magnet delivers
• Full understanding of the time required to complete each task

• Parallel tasking to include working during:
2 Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist 5670002 Revision 14.0
SMART Installation
• Equipment delivery – fill HEC coolant

• Patient table, dock or rear pedestal adjustment prior to magnet ramp
• TPS Reset prior to magnet ramp
1.1.5 SMART install timeline

The Mechanical Installation Team and the Primary Field Engineer drive the key elements of SMART
Installation.
The key to SMART installation is:

• To do any task one time
• Perform work in parallel with other tasks
• Select the days’ work based on available parts and site readiness
• Ensure all construction work not connected with path-of-magnet is complete prior to room closure
• Plan ahead and schedule support to meet anticipated due dates
• Work in a relaxed SMART method
• Remove empty boxes and packaging from the site during equipment delivery; keep as much
cardboard out of the MRI suite as possible.
• Complete tasks
The following timeline was achieved at a clinic pilot site in 11 days using SMART:
Day 1 - Magnet arrives, RF vendor closed RF cage/final tested the shield, FSE put magnet on life support
routing gas lines and power through SPW
Day 2 - Equipment delivered followed by a half day of Mech Installation (MI), FSE filled HEC with coolant.
FSE unpacked coils, installed GEM Coil insert into patient table,aligned dock, patient table, and rear
pedestal
Day 3 - MI continued
Day 4 - MI continued, FSE setup to ramp magnet
SMART Installation
Day 5 - MI completed (3.5 days), FSE completed SW Load, MI completion checks, TPS Reset (failed and
delayed to day 9)
Day 6 - HEC Start-up and final table alignments
Day 7 - Ramped magnet
Day 8 - Shimmed magnet
Day 9 - TPS Reset, complete calibrations to obtain first image
Day 10 and 11 - Finished calibrations to transfer system for clinical application
Summary - FSE on site 10 days, applied 124.5 hours with 76 hours to ramp and shim (6 iterations) (4
FSE applied time to ramp / shim)
1.2 SMART installation overview

Pre-Installation
Site Readiness NOTE: Timeline does

not include installa-
tion of site-specific
Pre-Magnet Delivery Mech Install options.
IMPORTANT: This is
Arrival Day 1 Magnet Installation intended to commu-
(16 hrs, 1 FE) nicate MR target in-
stallation timelines.
Arrival Day 2 This is not a substi-
tute for released MR
Arrival Day 3 Equipment Delivery product installation
(3.5 hrs, 1 FE, 1 Mech Installer) documents.
Installation
Day 1–5 Mechanical Installation

(50 hrs, 2 Mech Installers) (3 hrs, 1
FE)
Hand Off to GE
(1.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Day 6–7 Pre-Ramp Install

(2 hrs, 2 FEs)
Magnet Ramping System Power Up

(5 hrs, 2 FEs) (6 hrs, 1 FE)
SMART Installation
Day 8–9 Settling Time/Pressure Cals/Shim Prep Table/Bridge Adjustments &

Build (5 hrs, 1 FE) Enclosures
(48 hrs) (5.5 hrs, 1–2 FEs)
Day 10 Drift Test/Passive Shimming

(8 hrs, 1-2 FEs)
Day 11– Calibrations

13 (10.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Clean-Up
(8 hrs, 1 FE)
Turnover to Customer
Post-Install
Support Day 1–2 Additional Support Tasks

(16 hrs, 1 FE)
SMART Installation
Figure 1 Smart Installation Overview for IPM Magnet
SMART Installation
1.3 Service documentation

Direction Title Description
number
5670006 Service Methods Complete reference for service and FRU documentation
5670001 Preinstallation Manual Provides information to prepare a site for system installation:
• To define system requirements and interactions
• For the effective arrangement and interconnection of
system components
5500097 Pre-Magnet Delivery System Instructions to install:

Install • MDP LOTO placard
• HEC cabinet containing cooling loops and gradient blow-
er
• HEC to cryogen chiller hoses and insulation
• SPW and PEN Panel mounting frames
• Magnet room curtain rail/cable concealment kit
5670009 Magnet & Cryogens Instructions for set-up, commissioning and service of the su-
perconducting magnet
5670002 System Installation Instructions for installing system including cabinets, cables,
enclosures and operator workspace
SMART Installation
1.4 Site readiness

1.4.1 Equipment room requirements
Done? Done?
Equipment room HEC power complete

construction com-
plete / dust free
MDP installed RF filters backup wa-

ter
Chilled water instal- RF blank panels

led
Water flush bypass Med Gas / SR fire

suppression / DC
light
HEC water complete Trays / facility work

complete
SMART Installation
1.4.2 Scan room requirements

Done? Done?
Closet door hung Customer coils stor-

age / cabinets com-
plete
Walls painted
RF panels ready to PEN panel closet fin-

reassemble ished
(5670001, Chapter 3,
Section 6.2)
Magnet scan room Cable Trays Hung

opening (5670001, Chapter 6,
Section 2)
1.5 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation

NOTE
Must meet ISO 9001 requirements.
SMART Installation
Customer contractor tasks Mechanical installer or GE FE PMI or RF screen room vendor

tasks tasks
Electrical contractor
Install main disconnect panel Position HEC cabinet RF screen room construction
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.2 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5
Connect facility power to MDP Install Lockout-Tagout placard Verify floor levelness
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.4 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 6.5
Connect power from MDP to Connect power cord from Mark location of
HEC cabinet Cryocooler to HEC VibroAcoustic damping mats
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.1 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.7 5475706, Chapter 9
Customer plumber
Connect customer supplier Install HEC-Cry hoses and

water lines to HEC cabinet insulation
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.2 5500097, Chapter 2, 1.8-1.9
General contractor
Install curtain rail frame in Install penetration panel and

magnet room ceiling (customer mounting frames
option) 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.11
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.12
Install VibroAcoustic damping

mats
5475706, Chapter 9
1.6 Magnet installation

Magnet Delivery and Installation Manual: 5475706
Magnet delivery
SMART Installation
(continued)
Magnet unloading and movement

5475706, Chapter 6
Moving magnet to MR suite

5475706, Chapter 10
Note: Scheduled for same Post delivery tasks

day
GE FE
Magnet checks
5475706, Chapter 8
GE FE
Magnet Leveling
5475706, Chapter 11
RF screen vendor
Dock floor anchor installation
RF screen vendor
RF screen room test

5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5 and Chapter 7,
Sections 3 and 4
1.7 Equipment delivery
Labor hours: 3.5 hrs Tools needed:

FEs needed: 1 • Non-ferrous tool set
Mech installer needed: 1 • Cabinet dollies
(to direct where equipment delivers)
See Service Manuals for complete list.
SMART Installation
Important: Color-coded labels key:

• Throw away all boxes/packaging GE Manufacturing boxes have color coded la-
• Clear all working areas for full access bels
during installation • GREEN = Equipment Room
• Delivery material directly to final room • ORANGE = Operator Room
location • PURPLE = Magnet Room
• 1 Mechanical Installer on-site to direct • YELLOW = Post-Installation (Coils, Phan-
where material should go toms)
• Only touch parts once. No need to locate
parts when installation begins
Scan room Equipment room
Contractor FE
Enclosures HEC coolant

Unpacked and temporary storage Fill HEC
(For systems with DV28.0 and earlier soft- Throw away empty packaging
ware) Phantom cart loaded
Contractor Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables Deliver/arrange air, water,

Ready for routing interconnections
Ready for routing
Contractor
Unpack customer pads, documents, coils

Store in final locations
Operator room
Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables
Ready for routing
Contractor
GOC, table, chair, Op manuals

Temporary storage
SMART Installation
1.8 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)
Labor hours: Personnel needed: Tools needed:

Mech installer hours: Mech installers: 2 Non-ferrous tool set
96 FEs: 1 See Service Manuals for complete
FE hours: 3 hours dai- list
ly
Mechanical installation
Installation Manual: Gradient cable routing/

5670010 termination
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 9) (6 Hours, 2
MIs)
Ground cable installation

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 10, 13) (2
Hours, 2MIs)
RF transmit cables routing

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 12) (4 Hours, 2
MIs)
Scan room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Equipment room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Dock, bridge, rear pedestal

Install only. No adjustments (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23, 27) (3
Hours, 2 MIs)
Install blower box on PEN panel Connect equipment room cables

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 18) (3 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15) (4 Hours, 1 MI)
Connect scan room cables IRD/LED install

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24) (4 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 20 or 21, 22) (2 Hours, 1
MI)
SMART Installation
Scan room - install air and water hoses Equipment room - install air and water
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19) hoses
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19) (4 Hours, 1 MI)
Install fiber optic cables Dock, bridge, rear ped connection (NO
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23) (4 Hours, 1 MI) LEVELING)
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27) (2 Hours, 1 MI)
Dress all cables and install covers Install RF door switch and pneumatic alert
(9 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 17, 26) (3 Hours, 1 MI)
Complete PDU settings

(2 Hours, 1 MI)
GOC installation
(5670002, Ch 8) (3 Hours, 1 MI)
Wiring check and FE hand-off

(4 Hours, 1 MI)
1.9 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)
Labor hours: 1.5 hours Tools needed:

FEs needed: 1 Non-ferrous tool set
See Service Manuals for
complete list
Mechanical install hand-off to GE
Resolve open install issues
Final top-off of HEC coolant
HEC water leak check
SMART Installation
1.10 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)
Total labor hours: 19 hours Tools needed:

Pre-ramp: 3 hours See Service Manuals for complete list
Ramping: 10 hours
Start Up: 6 hours
FEs needed: 2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures
Table/bridge adjustments Pre-ramp installation
Dock, rear ped and bridge alignment Refill helium

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27) (5495018, Chapter 5) (1 Hour, 2 FEs)
Dock/table adjustments PDU power-up

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock X-Axis alignment Power-up checks: E-Off, MRU

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock/table engagement force Remove table from scan room to allow for
GEM coil installation during ramping
Magnet ramping System start-up (in parallel with ramping)
Preparation Install PA coil into table

(5495018, Ch 7, Sect 4) (1 Hour, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 7, Sect 4) (1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Ramp magnet System power-up

(5495018, Ch 7) (6 Hours, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 2, Sect 4) (1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
**Will not affect Ramping
Clean-up * Load SW VRE - boot check TPS Reset

(1 Hours, 2 FEs) (2.5 Hours, 1 FE)
SMART Installation
Start system/load options

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
* If the site received a staged system with enhanced GOC, the FE only has to perform network configuration.
1.11 Adjustments and calibrations
Total labor hours: 29.5 Hours Tools needed:

Cals/shim prep: 5 Hours • Non-ferrous tool set
Adjustments/enclosures: 8.5 Hours • Level
Shimming: 16 Hours
See Service Manuals for complete list
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures.
Magnet Set-
tling Time
(Day 8-9 )
Calibrations Enclosures
Coil datapath diagnostic Final cover test fit

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) 5670002, Ch 6 or 7 (2 Hours,
2 FEs)
TR dynamic disable cals

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Tune body coil

(1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Finish SW InSite checkout

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
RF calibrations
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
Shim camera prep UPM calibrations

(2 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
SMART Installation
1st image
(minutes, 1 FE)
Day 10 Passive shimming
Drift test
(5495018, Chapter 8, Section 3) (15 minutes,
1 FE)
Shimming
(5495018, Chapter 8) (20 Hours, 2 FEs)
1.12 System calibrations
Total labor hours: 18.5 Hours

Calibrations: 10.5 Hours
Clean Up: 8 Hours
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation and Calibration Wizard for latest calibration procedures.
Day 11
System calibrations Day 12-13
Fwd/rev quad check EPT calibrations

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
DQA 1st pass PAC checks

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Gradient fidelity diag GOC calibrations

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
White pixel Coil MCQA

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE) (4 Hours, 1 FE)
LV shim gradshim Clean-up

SMART Installation
Grafidy test
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
DQA 2nd pass

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
System gain
(0.75 Hours, 1 FE)
SPT *Start at end

(1 Hour, 1 FE) of day, run
during eve-
ning
SMART Installation for IPM Magnet
Chapter 2 SMART Installation for IPM

Magnet
2.1 SMART Installation Overview for IPM Magnet

Pre-Installation
Site Readiness NOTE: Timeline does

not include installa-
tion of site-specific
Pre-Magnet Delivery Mech Install options.
IMPORTANT: This is
Arrival Day 1 Magnet Installation intended to commu-
(14 hrs, 1 FE) nicate MR target in-
stallation timelines.
Arrival Day 2 This is not a substi-
tute for released MR
Arrival Day 3 Equipment Delivery product installation
(3.5 hrs, 1 FE, 1 Mech Installer) documents.
Installation
Day 1–5 Mechanical Installation

(50 hrs, 2 Mech Installers) (3 hrs, 1
FE)
Hand Off to GE
(1.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Day 6–8 Pre-Ramp Install

(2 hrs, 2 FEs)
Magnet Ramping System Power Up

(3 hrs, 2 FEs) (6 hrs, 1 FE)
Cals/Shim Prep Table/Bridge Adjustments &

(5 hrs, 1 FE) Enclosures
(5.5 hrs, 1–2 FEs)
Day 9 Drift Test/Passive Shimming

(8 hrs, 1-2 FEs)
Day 10– Calibrations

12 (11.5 hrs, 1 FE)
Clean-Up
(8 hrs, 1 FE)
Turnover to Customer
Post-Install
Support Day 1–2 Additional Support Tasks

(16 hrs, 1 FE)
2.2 Service documentation

Direction Title Description
number
5670006 Service Methods Complete reference for service and FRU documentation
5670001 Preinstallation Manual Provides information to prepare a site for system installation:
• To define system requirements and interactions
• For the effective arrangement and interconnection of
system components
5500097 Pre-Magnet Delivery System Instructions to install:

Install • MDP LOTO placard
• HEC cabinet containing cooling loops and gradient blow-
er
• HEC to cryogen chiller hoses and insulation
• SPW and PEN Panel mounting frames
• Magnet room curtain rail/cable concealment kit
5670002 System Installation Instructions for installing system including cabinets, cables,
enclosures and operator workspace
5807458 Magnet Handling Manual for Installations for Magnet transportation to suite
IPM Magnet
5796143 Magnet Cryogen Manual for Introduction for Magnet setup, commissioning and service of
IPM Magnet superconducting magnet.
2.3 Site readiness

2.3.1 Equipment room requirements
Done? Done?
Equipment room HEC power complete

construction com-
plete / dust free
MDP installed RF filters backup wa-

ter
Chilled water instal- RF blank panels

led
Water flush bypass Med Gas / SR fire

suppression / DC
light
HEC water complete Trays / facility work

complete
2.3.2 Scan room requirements

Done? Done?
Closet door hung Customer coils stor-

age / cabinets com-
plete
Walls painted
RF panels ready to PEN panel closet fin-

reassemble ished
(5670001, Chapter 3,
Section 6.2)
Magnet scan room Cable Trays Hung

opening (5670001, Chapter 6,
Section 2)
2.4 Pre-magnet delivery mechanical installation

NOTE
Must meet ISO 9001 requirements.
Customer contractor tasks Mechanical installer or GE FE PMI or RF screen room vendor

tasks tasks
Install main disconnect panel Position HEC cabinet RF screen room construction
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.2 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5
Connect facility power to MDP Install Lockout-Tagout placard Verify floor levelness
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.3 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.4 5670001, Chapter 3, Section 6.5
Connect power from MDP to Connect power cord from Mark location of
HEC cabinet Cryocooler to HEC VibroAcoustic damping mats
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.1 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.7 5475706, Chapter 9
Customer plumber
Connect customer supplier Install HEC-Cry hoses and

water lines to HEC cabinet insulation
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.6.2 5500097, Chapter 2, 1.8-1.9
General contractor
Install curtain rail frame in Install penetration panel and

magnet room ceiling (customer mounting frames
option) 5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.11
5500097, Chapter 2, Section 1.12
Install VibroAcoustic damping

mats
5475706, Chapter 9
2.5 Magnet installation

Magnet delivery
(continued)
Magnet unloading and movement

5807458, Chapter 6
Moving magnet to MR suite

5807458, Chapter 10
Note: Scheduled for same Post delivery tasks

day
GE FE
Magnet checks
5807458, Chapter 8
GE FE
Magnet Leveling
5807458, Chapter 11
RF screen vendor
Dock floor anchor installation
RF screen vendor
RF screen room test

5670001, Chapter 3, Section 5 and Chapter 7,
Sections 3 and 4
2.6 Equipment delivery
Labor hours: 3.5 hrs Tools needed:

FEs needed: 1 • Non-ferrous tool set
Mech installer needed: 1 • Cabinet dollies
(to direct where equipment delivers)
See Service Manuals for complete list.
Important: Color-coded labels key:

• Throw away all boxes/packaging GE Manufacturing boxes have color coded la-
• Clear all working areas for full access bels
during installation • GREEN = Equipment Room
• Delivery material directly to final room • ORANGE = Operator Room
location • PURPLE = Magnet Room
• 1 Mechanical Installer on-site to direct • YELLOW = Post-Installation (Coils, Phan-
where material should go toms)
• Only touch parts once. No need to locate
parts when installation begins
Scan room Equipment room
Contractor FE
Enclosures HEC coolant

Unpacked and temporary storage Fill HEC
(For systems with DV28.0 and earlier soft- Throw away empty packaging
ware) Phantom cart loaded
Contractor Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables Deliver/arrange air, water,

Ready for routing interconnections
Ready for routing
Contractor
Unpack customer pads, documents, coils

Store in final locations
Operator room
Contractor
Deliver/arrange cables
Ready for routing
Contractor
GOC, table, chair, Op manuals

Temporary storage
2.7 Mechanical installation (day 1-5)
Labor hours: Personnel needed: Tools needed:

Mech installer hours: Mech installers: 2 Non-ferrous tool set
96 FEs: 1 See Service Manuals for complete
FE hours: 3 hours dai- list
ly
Mechanical installation
Installation Manual: Gradient cable routing/

5670010 termination
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 9) (6 Hours, 2
MIs)
Ground cable installation

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 10, 13) (2
Hours, 2MIs)
RF transmit cables routing

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 12) (4 Hours, 2
MIs)
Scan room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Equipment room cables - route and confirm lengths

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15) (3 Hours, 2 MIs)
Dock, bridge, rear pedestal

Install only. No adjustments (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23, 27) (3
Hours, 2 MIs)
Install blower box on PEN panel Connect equipment room cables

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 18) (3 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 14-15) (4 Hours, 1 MI)
Connect scan room cables IRD/LED install

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 24) (4 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 20 or 21, 22) (2 Hours, 1
MI)
Scan room - install air and water hoses Equipment room - install air and water
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19) hoses
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 19) (4 Hours, 1 MI)
Install fiber optic cables Dock, bridge, rear ped connection (NO
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 23) (4 Hours, 1 MI) LEVELING)
(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27) (2 Hours, 1 MI)
Dress all cables and install covers Install RF door switch and pneumatic alert
(9 Hours, 1 MI) (5670002, Ch 5, Sect 17, 26) (3 Hours, 1 MI)
Complete PDU settings

(2 Hours, 1 MI)
GOC installation
(5670002, Ch 8) (3 Hours, 1 MI)
Wiring check and FE hand-off

(4 Hours, 1 MI)
2.8 Mechanical install hand-off to GE (day 5)
Labor hours: 1.5 hours Tools needed:

FEs needed: 1 Non-ferrous tool set
See Service Manuals for
complete list
Mechanical install hand-off to GE
Resolve open install issues
Final top-off of HEC coolant
HEC water leak check
2.9 Magnet ramping and system start-up (day 6-7)
Total labor hours: 19 hours Tools needed:

Pre-ramp: 3 hours See Service Manuals for complete list
Ramping: 10 hours
Start Up: 6 hours
FEs needed: 2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures
Table/bridge adjustments Pre-ramp installation
Dock, rear ped and bridge alignment

(5670002, Ch 5, Sect 27)
Dock/table adjustments PDU power-up

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock X-Axis alignment Power-up checks: E-Off, MRU

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Dock/table engagement force Remove table from scan room to allow for
GEM coil installation during ramping
Magnet ramping System start-up (in parallel with ramping)
Preparation Install PA coil into table

(5796143, Ch 7, Sect 5) (1 Hour, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 7, Sect 4) (1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Ramp magnet System power-up

(5796143, Ch 8) (6 Hours, 2 FEs) (5670002, Ch 2, Sect 4) (1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
**Will not affect Ramping
Clean-up * Load SW VRE - boot check TPS Reset

(1 Hours, 2 FEs) (2.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Start system/load options

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
* If the site received a staged system with enhanced GOC, the FE only has to perform network configuration.
2.10 Adjustments and calibrations
Total labor hours: 29.5 Hours Tools needed:

Cals/shim prep: 5 Hours • Non-ferrous tool set
Adjustments/enclosures: 8.5 Hours • Level
Shimming: 16 Hours
See Service Manuals for complete list
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation Calibration Wizard for the latest calibration procedures.
Magnet Set-
tling Time
(Day 8 )
Calibrations Enclosures
Coil datapath diagnostic Final cover test fit

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) 5670002, Ch 6 or 7 (2 Hours,
2 FEs)
TR dynamic disable cals

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Tune body coil

(1.5 Hours, 1 FE)
Finish SW InSite checkout

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
RF calibrations
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
Shim camera prep UPM calibrations

(2 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
1st image
(minutes, 1 FE)
Day 9 Passive shimming
Drift test
(5796143, Chapter 8, Section 3) (15 minutes,
1 FE)
Shimming
(5796143, Chapter 8) (8 Hours, 2 FEs)
2.11 System calibrations
Total labor hours: 18.5 Hours

Calibrations: 11.5 Hours
Clean Up: 8 Hours
FEs needed: 1-2
IMPORTANT: Refer to Installation and Calibration Wizard for latest calibration procedures.
Day 10
System calibrations Day 11-12
Fwd/rev quad check EPT calibrations

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
DQA 1st pass PAC checks

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE) (0.25 Hours, 1 FE)
Gradient fidelity diag GOC calibrations

(0.25 Hours, 1 FE) (0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
White pixel Coil MCQA

LV shim gradshim Clean-up

Grafidy test
(1 Hour, 1 FE)
DQA 2nd pass

(0.5 Hours, 1 FE)
System gain
(0.75 Hours, 1 FE)
SPT *Start at end

(1 Hour, 1 FE) of day, run
during eve-
ning
Page intentionally left blank
Getting Started
Chapter 3 Getting Started
3.1 Overview Information

3.1.1 System Configuration
This manual provides instructions to complete the installation of a 450w GEM, 450w non-GEM, or SIGNA
Artist system. Many of the installation procedures are same for either system. Those procedures that
are specific to either system will be identified.
Additional options are installed according to the installation manual delivered with the option.
3.1.2 Site Ready Check for Mechanical Installation

Before equipment is delivered, the following must be complete to avoid delays and confusion.
• Pre-installation work must be complete. Refer to: Direction 5670001, Optima MR450w and
Artist Preinstallation Manual
• Magnet Delivery and Installation complete. Refer to: Direction 5475706, Magnet Handling for
1.5T R and HM Series Magnets 3.0T W, WB and UA Series Magnets
For IPM magnet: Magnet Delivery and Installation complete. Refer to: Direction 5807458,
Magnet Handling Manual .
• Magnet Subsystem should be installed. Refer to: Direction 5495018, Magnet & Cryogen Manual
for Passively Shimmed Magnets
For IPM magnet: Magnet Subsystem should be installed. Refer to: Direction 5796143, Magnet
Cryogen Manual.
CAUTION
POTENTIAL TRIP HAZARD!
Dock Anchor Stud in front of magnet.
Remove stud or clearly mark the area to prevent tripping. Stud is to be
reinstalled when completing the Dock installation process.
Getting Started
Figure 2 Location of Dock Anchor Stud
3.1.3 Product Delivery Instructions

The “Shipping Document” lists catalog numbers delivered. Review and confirm that order is delivered
complete. Check impact on installation schedule if Catalogs and/or packing boxes are missing and/or
noted as shipped short.
NOTE
Two or more people are required to accept delivery of equipment due to weight and size
of cabinets and other components.
Labels that are attached to the outside of packing boxes summarize box contents.
NOTE
Project Manager Install (PMI): Make sure the right combination of short and/or long cables
have been delivered to site.
“Product Delivery Instructions” (PDI) specify box contents, part numbers, and shipping procedure. The
PDI is numbered according to the catalog number (for example, PDI - M7000BL is for the Fixed Site
Installation Kit). Lists of items included with each box are detailed by separate checklists, or a separate
sheet that provides a summry of that box contents. Refer to PDI and packing lists for information
specific to your shipment.
A set of service and operator manuals is delivered with the Fixed Site Kit. Refer to checklists packed with
“Technical Publication” boxes for a list of delivered documents.
The newer MR System delivery includes two lean carts (which helps the mechanical installers to identify
the parts easily), and some additional hardware sub-systems that are sub-assembled at factory.
1. The equipment delivery will have a lean cart for Equipment/Operator room with the following parts
in it according to the picture and layout shown (Figure 3 on page 35 and Figure 4 on page 36).
a. Water Hose Hardware that needs to be used in the equipment room and the Desktop
Collector are placed in a tray on top of the cart.
b. Hose reels are added to the cart to secure the excess of hose and cables.
c. The following cables are placed in the equipment lean cart with appropriate labels.
Getting Started
(For MR450w and Artist T) E2002, E2020, E2023, E3030, E3014, E1307, E4007, E4002,
E4005, E4009 and E4010
(For Artist and Artist XT) P2020, E3030, E3014, E1307, E4007, E4002, E4005, E4009, E4010,
E3391
d. Gradient Coil water hoses (Supply and Return) (to be used in the equipment room) are added
to the cart.
e. Keyboard, SCIM, Operator Alert and LCD monitor are also added to the equipment room lean
cart.
Figure 3 Equipment Room Lean Cart
Getting Started
Figure 4 Equipment Room Lean Cart Layout
2. The equipment delivery will have a lean cart for Magnet Room with the following parts in it
according to the picture and layout shown (Figure 5 on page 37 and Figure 6 on page 37).
a. Water Hose Hardware that needs to be used in the Magnet Room are placed in a tray on top of
the lean cart.
b. Air Hoses clamps and fittings are placed in another tray on top of the lean cart.
c. The following cables are bundled together and added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) M3311 and M3315
(For MR450w and Artist T) M3316 and M3309
(For Artist and Artist XT) M3316 and M3391
d. The following cables are bundled together and added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
(For MR450w and Artist T) M1303 and M1304
e. The following cables are placed in the Magnet Room lean cart with appropriate labels.
(For MR450w) P2026, P2004, P2003, M2025, M3030, M3300 (only for 450w with SRPS),
M2300, M4005, M3314, M3375, M3376, M3377, and M3378
(For MR450w with ICE and Artist T) P2026, P2003, M2025, M3030, M2300, M4005, M3355,
M3314, M3375, M3376, M3377, and M3378
(For Artist and Artist XT) P2026, P2004, P2006, P2003, M1303, M2025, M3030, M4005,
M3314, M3375, M3378, M3392 and M3355
f. Left and Right Operator Control panels are kept inside the Magnet Room lean cart.
g. In Room Display is added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
Getting Started
h. Blower box is added to the Magnet Room lean cart.

i. Gradient water hoses (both Supply and Return) are added to the Magnet Room lean cart.
Figure 5 Scan Room Lean Cart
Figure 6 Scan Room Lean Cart Layout
3. The PGR cabinet comes sub-assembled with the following cables as shown in Figure 7 on page 38.
a. The following cables go from PGR to GOC are bundled and sub-assembled with PGR cabinet.
Getting Started
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E0003 and E4008
(For MR450w only) E3011 and E3015
(For Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3011, E3015 and E3037
b. The following cables go from PGR to HEC Signal box are bundled and sub-assembled with PGR
cabinet
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3013 and E3028
Figure 7 PGR Cabinet Subassembly
4. The PEN cabinet comes sub-assembled with the following cables as shown in Figure 8 on page 39.
a. The following cables go from PEN to GOC are bundled and sub-assembled with PEN cabinet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3017, E3018 and E3031
b. The following cables that goes from PEN to PGR cabinet are bundled and sub-assembled with
PEN cabinet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E3002, E3006, E3008 and E3009
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E1003, E1004 and E1005
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, and Artist XT) E0004 just attached to PEN cabinet by itself
Getting Started
Figure 8 PEN Cabinet Subassembly
5. If the whole system is staged or just “SFIed (Sub-assembly For Install) and kitted” from the factory,
then the GOC has the following items pre-installed. All SFIed GOC will have a yellow color label as
shown in Figure 9 on page 39. If it is part of a staged system, then the system will also receive a
factory Save Info DVD. As some of the software components are pre-loaded as shown in Table 1 on
page 40, there is no need to install them in the field.
Figure 9 GOC Subassembly
Getting Started
Table 1 Preloaded Software
SW Items GOC- Staged GOC SFI
IRD Sub Assembled X X
Linux Operating System (OS) X X
MR Application Software X X
Restricted Service Software X @ Site
VRE OS SW and Configuration X @ Site
Network Configuration @ Site @ Site
System Configuration X @ Site
6. Magnet comes sub-assembled with the following cables.

a. The following cables go from Magnet to Rear Ped are bundled together and attached with the
magnet.
(For MR450w and Artist T) M1315, M3320, M3321, M3322, M3323 and M3351
b. The following cables that go from Magnet to Pen Wall is sub-assembled with magnet.
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, Artist XT) M3302, M3303, M3312 and M3313
(For MR450w, Artist T, Artist, Artist XT) M1310 and M1312
Figure 10 Magnet Subassembly
3.1.4 Damage in Transportation

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation
“damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or
“signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or
concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event,
within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A
transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14
day period
File a report with:
• Call 1-800-548-3366. Select “Install Support Services for FOA and MIS”.
Getting Started
• Contact your local service coordinator for more information on this process.
3.1.5 MR System Shipping and Storage Requirements

1. The customer must provide a shipping dock or other staging area for unloading system
components.
2. The customer is responsible for unloading and moving all system components from the delivery
truck or van to final locations in the MR suite. This includes:
• Door and other openings are sufficiently wide to allow passage
• Sufficient room is provided for any required dollies or rigging
3. The MR system must be shipped and stored within the environmental requirements listed below in
Table 2 on page 41.
NOTE
Some equipment is liquid cooled. After coolant is added, the equipment must be kept
from freezing.
Table 2 Transportation and Storage Environmental Conditions for System Components
System Equip- Temperature Temperature Relative Hu- Humidity Atmospheric Pres-

ment Range Change midity Change sure
Cabinets and Sys- -22 to 158° F 68° F/Hr (20° 5-95% Non- 30%/Hr 1060 to 525 hPa
tem (-30 to 70° C) C/Hr) condensing
Host Computer1 -22 to 140° F 8-90% Non- 1060 to 500 hPa

(-30 to 60° C) condensing
LCD Monitor -22 to 158° F 10-80% Non- 1060 to 525 hPa

(-30 to 70° C) condensing
8-Port Ethernet -22 to 158° F 10-90% Non- 1060 to 525 hPa

Hub (-30 to 70° C) condensing
Magnet -22 to 158° F n/a n/a

(-30 to 70° C)
3.1.6 Non-English Label Installation

Components and accessories delivered to this site may have English labels attached to them. For non-
English sites, optional multi-language labels have also been supplied.
If required, non-English labels should be attached over the English labels.
• For Surface Coils and Coil Cables - Apply the appropriate label over the English label. The label is
included with the coil component.
• For all other labels, follow the label update procedures in the manual or on the applicable multi-
language label sheet.
Getting Started
Verify at the end of the installation that the original English labels are covered by new labels
representing the native language of the customer.
3.1.7 Product Locator

During installation, the Install FE shall confirm that the Model and Serial Numbers are part of the asset.
If missing, use either the gib web interface (http://gib.gehealthcare.com/gib/gib_entry.jsp) or the
MyPLCReader App. This information will then be loaded directly to Siebel by the IB Verification Team.
To install the MyPLCReader App, use the following procedure.
1. From the GE App Icon, search for and Install the MyPLCReader App on your iPhone or iPad.
Figure 11 MyPLCReader App
2. Update the Configuration Page.

a. The first time the App opens, the Configuration Page will open.
b. Enter your SSO, Country and if in US select the edit button to change the default email
address (by default, this app will send the email to the Europe IB Team
Resource.EuropeanCentralAdminGIB@ge.com). The email to be used in US is
usa.ib.verification@ge.com.
3. Start your first Scan.
a. Go to the Menu, make the appropriate selection for the job you are performing. New Install,
Upgrade System, or Update System.
b. Enter the applicable Data, Install End Date, System ID & RFS#.
c. Click Scan Bar Codes and start scanning each barcode on the PL Cards.
d. Click the “Email” Button.
Getting Started
e. Email is sent to the Default email address, which was set up earlier.
3.1.8 Required Tools

WARNING
FERROUS MATERIAL HAZARD!
IF MAGNET IS ENERGIZED, THE CRIMP TOOL, BLOWER BOX, AND OTHER
TOOLS AND PARTS REQUIRED FOR THIS INSTALLATION THAT CONTAIN
FERROUS MATERIAL WILL BE STRONGLY ATTRACTED TO MAGNET AND
MAY BECOME DANGEROUS PROJECTILES.
KEEP ALL FERROUS TOOLS AS FAR FROM THE MAGNET AS POSSIBLE.
Tools to install the system are listed in following table:
Table 3 Installation Equipment
Item GE Part Number Description
1 --- N/A
2 --- Wrecking bar
3 --- Claw hammer, 3/4 lb
4 46-271138G1 Restricted Access Control Kit. Contains two plastic warning signs for posting at
site during installation and service activity.
5 --- Aluminum platform ladder, 47.5 inches (1206.5mm) (See Note 1)
6 5790054 Gradient Cable Tool Kit

• 5790056 — Thomas & Betts TBM5-S (Thomas & Betts TBM5 can also be
used)
• 5790057 — Greenlee Cable Cutter model 45207
• 5790059 — Greenlee Insulation Stripper model 1903
• 5790061 — Greenlee Replacement Blades model 13544
• 5790062 — BAUSCH & LOMB 10X Magnification Inspection Loupe model
81-41-70
• 5790064 — Laminated inventory list with picture inside case
• 5790053 — Hard shell, sealed, latched flight case with handle, wheels,
and custom formed foam interior to hold each tool
7 46-320273G3 or G4 Non-Magnetic Tool Kit - Universal (See Note 2)
8 5534134 Non-Magnetic Torque Wrench Kit
9 46-301450G1 Fiber optic connector repair kit (See Note 2)
10 46-198094P1 Wrist grounding strap
11 --- Volt Meter
Getting Started
Installation Equipment continued

Item GE Part Number Description
12 --- Extension cords, with ground conductor
13 --- Power strip, grounded type, with minimum of five outlets
14 --- Plastic or aluminum flashlight
15 --- Assorted crimp tools.
16 --- Non-magnetic level, 2 foot length mimimum
17 --- Non-magnetic tape rule, 12 ft
18 --- Assorted drill bits
19 --- Inspection mirror
20 --- Hobby and utility knives
21 8 Inch Pipe Wrench (2)
22 5135527-7 Grafidy Kit
23 5182417 1.5T MCRv Toolkit
Note 1: Supplied as part of Optima.
Note 2: Supplied by GE until turnover of system to customer, then available as part of a GE Cryogen and/or Serv-
ice Contract.
3.2 Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO)

The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) has been installed and is providing power to the HEC Cabinet and
Cryogen Cooler Compressor. Before installing the PGR Cabinet, the PDU input switch on the front of the
MDP must be locked out and tagged.
NOTICE
LOTO must be applied to the HEC cabinet before installation of coolant

hoses, data cables, and ground wire. Refer to HEC LOTO procedures below.
It is also important to complete the installation of all hoses and cables as
soon as possible so that coolant supply is restored to all components to
prevent damage.
3.2.1 LOTO prerequisites
Getting Started
3.2.1.1 Procedure overview

The steps in this Lock Out /Tag Out (LOTO) procedure must be performed by a LOTO-authorized GE Field
Engineer. Completing all the steps in this procedure ensures a safe environment and avoids equipment
damage when working on these parts.
Table 4 Affected by LOTO
Name of Equipment Number of Titles of Employees Titles of Affect- How to

Locks Authorized to per- ed Employees Notify
form LOTO
Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC) 2 per GE Field GE Field Engineers Hospital Person- Verbal,
Engineer (FE) nel Posted
Power, Gradient, RF Cabinet signs
(PGR) Power Distribution Unit
(PDU)
NOTE
The following table describes the type, location, and magnitude of energy for LOTO.
Energy Source Yes No Location of Energy Isolating Magnitude of Energy

Means
Electrical x • Main Disconnect Panel 380 to 480 VAC

(MDP)
• Circuit Breaker Panel
Pneumatic x
Hydraulic x
Gas/Water/Steam x
Chemical x
Mechanical Motion x
Gravity x
Springs x
Thermal x
Stored Energy x
Air Under Pressure x
Oil Under Pressure x
Getting Started
(continued)
Energy Source Yes No Location of Energy Isolating Magnitude of Energy
Means
Water Under Pressure x Facility water valves at top of • 6.0 Bar (87 psi) Input
HEC and MDP Circuit Breaker • 5.7 Bar (82.8 psi) Output
Panel Gradient Coil (GC)
• 5.0 Bar (80 psi) Output
Power, Gradient, and RF
(PGR) Cabinet
Gas Under Pressure x
Steam x
Other x
3.2.1.2 Preliminary requirements
Table 5 Tools and test equipment
Item Part #
Personal Lock 46-194427P320
Multi-locking Device (If multiple service people) 46-194427P313
Red Warning LOTO Tag 46-194427P322
Digital Voltmeter 46-194427P284
3.2.1.3 Safety
DANGER
ELECTROCUTION HAZARD!
HIGH VOLTAGE PRESENT.
USE PROPER LOCK OUT / TAG OUT PROCEDURES BEFORE installing,
servicing and/or maintaining.
Getting Started
3.2.2 Applying LOTO to PGR cabinet PDU on MDP

NOTICE
The following process only removes power from the PGR Cabinet. The HEC
will continue to receive power so that the cryogen compressor can continue
operation uninterrupted. Powering off the HEC circuit breaker will cause the
Cryogen Cooler Compressor to also lose power. If this is done make sure
that the HEC downtime is minimized to avoid boiling off Cryogens.
Figure 12 PDU input switch on MDP with LOTO lock
1. To prepare for shutdown of equipment, notify affected personnel working in the area the LOTO is
being performed.
2. Observe that the POWER ON light is on. It signifies the main breaker is closed and control power is
on.
3. Make sure the PDU input switch is in the OFF position
4. Lock Out/Tag Out the PDU input switch on the MDP
3.2.3 LOTO for Heat Exchanger Cabinet (HEC)

NOTICE
Powering off the HEC circuit breaker will cause the Cryogen Cooler
Compressor to also lose power. If this is done make sure that the HEC
downtime is minimized to avoid boiling off Cryogens.
Getting Started
3.2.3.1 Type(s) of equipment and/or method(s) used to ensure

disconnection(s)
A personal lock and tag and ball valve LOTO device at the site per FE working on the de-energized
equipment at the time of LOTO.
3.2.3.2 Applying LOTO to the MDP

1. Disable the Magnet Monitor to prevent false alarms if HEC power is locked and tagged out.
NOTE
Check with the facility owner to determine the proper shutdown method for the
chiller.
2. Prepare for shutdown of the equipment. Notify affected personnel working in the area that LOTO is
being performed.
Figure 13 Powered HEC cabinet
3. Look at the variable speed Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) located on the front of the HEC to visually
confirm that power is on.
NOTE
Powering off HEC without first powering down pumps from VFD can put the VFD at
risk of damage.
4. Toggle off the pumps and blower with the PLC Signal Box keypad as follows:
• Blower: Press and hold the up-arrow ( ^ ), and press F1
• Gradient Coil Pump: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F2
• Power Electronics: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F3
Getting Started
5. Turn off the circuit breakers labeled GC, PE, BLOWER, and CRYO on front of the HEC power box.
Figure 14 HEC circuit breaker
6. At the front of the MDP, move the HEC circuit breaker to the OFF position and apply LOTO.
NOTICE
Powering off the HEC circuit breaker will cause the Cryocooler
Compressor to also lose power. Ensure that the HEC downtime is
minimized to avoid boiling off cryogens.
7. Look at the variable speed drive LEDs again to visually confirm to ensure that power is off before
removing the front panel.
Getting Started
Figure 15 Location of screws on HEC power box
8. Verify all energy is dissipated. Carefully remove the six screws securing the HEC power box front
cover and remove the cover.
Figure 16 Terminal points of HEC power box
9. Confirm that voltage is removed by testing the line-to-line voltage at the top and bottom of the
terminal points.
10. Replace the power box front cover.
3.2.3.3 Applying LOTO to HEC shut-off valves

1. Prepare for shut down. Check with the facility owner to determine the proper shutdown method for
the chiller.
2. Shut off both the facility Return and Supply Valves by turning the handle to a 90º angle.
Getting Started
Figure 17 LOTO installed on return valve
Figure 18 LOTO installed on supply valve
3. Apply LOTO device to both the return and supply valves.
Getting Started
4. Confirm there is no water draining from quick disconnect, and pressure in the line is relieved.
3.2.4 Removing LOTO
3.2.4.1 Removing LOTO for the HEC

At the completion of the installation of hoses and cables in the HEC cabinet, complete the following
steps to return power to the HEC cabinet.
1. Prepare for re-energizing the equipment. Notify affected personnel working in the area that LOTO
will be removed.
2. If LOTO device was installed, remove personal LOTO device from the HEC circuit breaker on the
MDP.
3. If LOTO device(s) were installed, remove personal LOTO device(s) from both return and supply
valves.
4. If the MDP circuit breaker was turned off at the front panel of the MDP, switch ON the HEC circuit
breaker.
5. Toggle on the pumps and blower from the PLC signal box keypad as follows:
• Power Electronics: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F3
• Gradient Coil Pump: Press and hold the up arrow ( ^ ), and press F2
• Blower: Press and hold the up-arrow ( ^ ), and press F1
6. If return and supply valves were shut off, return the handles in line to the 0º angle.
3.2.4.2 Removing LOTO for the PGR

At the completion of the system installation, refer to the Service Methods DVD for procedures to remove
LOTO on PDU input switch.
3.3 System components

3.3.1 Basic system
The basic system consists of the following major equipment:
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The phantom cart and the LVshim
phantom side lobes are not used and are not delivered with the system.
Getting Started
Figure 19 System components
• The magnet with magnet enclosure and magnet accessories

• Shield/cryocooler compressor cabinet
• Gradient (XRMW) and RF body coils and head coil
• Main disconnect panel
• System electronics cabinets:
• (For MR450w and MR450w GEM) PGR cabinet containing gradient drivers and power
distribution unit module with unregulated transformer 380/400/415/480 Volt, 50/60 Hz with
power filter, CAM chassis or ICE and ASC with boards for 32 channels, components for the
Volume Reconstruction Engine (VRE), narrow band RF amplifier
Getting Started
• (For SIGNA Artist, Artist T, Artist XT) PGR cabinet containing Gradient drivers and power
distribution unit module with unregulated transformer 380/400/415/480 Volt, 50/60 Hz with
power filter, Integrated Control Engine (ICE) and KASC, components for the Volume
Reconstruction Engine (VRE), narrow band RF amplifier. Supports 32 channels (Artist T), 96
channels (Artist), or 128 channels (Artist XT).
• HEC cabinet containing the cryocoolers supply, cooling loops, and gradient blower.
• PEN cabinet containing the PHPS2, scan room power supply, CAN Fiber I/F, T/R DD Driver
module, penetration panel, and MEMS power supply (Artist and Artist XT)
Software version DV29 and later introduces support for a non-MEMS system configuration.
Existing or upgraded systems will continue to use the MEMS power supply. Newly installed
systems may not have the MEMS power supply. Identify the presence or absence of MEMS on
your system by looking for the MEMS DC Power Supply Assembly (part number 6859128) in
the power supply rack of the ISC.
• Second Penetration Wall (SPW) containing gradient filter, scan room filters & I/F, and ramp/
shim access
• Operator workspace equipment: GOC computer cabinet (containing Linux PC and GOCAA), LCD
widescreen monitor, keyboard, SCIM, mouse and mouse pad, and chair
• Pneumatic patient alert system
• Patient transport table and cradle
• Patient accessories such as: a phantom kit, patient log book, head cushion and sponges, chin and
forehead straps, body wedges, knee cushions, and security/restraint straps
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The LVshim phantom inner ball,
and the body TLT and loader phantom will ship together with their storage holder
pads. Do not discard the storage holder pads with the packing material.
• Gating accessories which include: patient cardiac leads, peripheral gating probe, and respiratory
bellows
3.3.2 System options

This section lists options that have site preparation impact.
• Advantage Workstation (AW). NOTE: LCD monitor is recommended for AW to be located near the
system Operator Workspace due to gauss field proximity limits
• Bar code reader for use in conjunction with HIS/RIS software option
• Oxygen monitor
• BrainWave option
• Additional patient transport table with cradle
• Other hard copy devices and patient accessories
Getting Started
3.4 Installation process
3.4.1 Installation procedure

The following flow chart is a guide for an orderly and efficient installation of the GEM or non-GEM
system. Note that many procedures may be performed in parallel and may be performed in any order
according to the specific situation of each site.
NOTE
All on-site construction must be completed before equipment is delivered and installation
starts. Attempting to install the system while construction is being completed will impact
installation efficiency and further delay site completion. Making sure that all
preinstallation and construction work is completed before equipment is delivered will
usually result in an earlier turnover date.
3.4.1.1 Installation flowchart explanation

This installation flowchart has been developed assuming that all equipment has been delivered
complete. Make sure that every part required is available before starting.
NOTE
These procedures are similar to cable maps in that they are to be removed from this
binder and used at the location where hardware installation is being performed. The
Procedures must be returned to the binder for future reference upon completion of the
installation.
The flow chart references the section in this manual for completion. The columns are defined as follows:
• Step - The recommended order of installation procedures
• Completion Check - This box MUST be checked after completion of procedure per ISO 9001
requirements.
• System - This box spans the entire column. Mark with a check (√) when completion of a
System procedure
• Eq - This box spans half the column. Mark with a check (√) when completion of a Equipment
Room procedure
• Mag - This box spans half the column. Mark with a check (√) when completion of a Magnet
Room procedure
• System - Installation procedures that are not specific to the equipment or magnet rooms but
usually have to be completed before proceeding to the next step
• Equipment Room - Installation procedure to be performed in the equipment room or operator
workspace area
• Magnet Room - Installation procedure to be completed in the magnet room
Getting Started
3.4.1.2 Installation flowchart
Table 6 Installation flowchart
Completion
System
check
Step
System
Equipment room Magnet room
Eq Mag
PREREQUISITES FOR SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1 Magnet Delivery and Installation completed
2 Magnet and Cryogen Subsystem, Section 1, completed
3 Customer supplied water cooling installed
4 Magnet room exhaust fan installed and operational
5 Magnet room cryogen vent to building installed
6 Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) installed
7 Site electrical wiring and HVAC installed and operational
8 SPW and PEN Panel frames installed
9 HEC cabinet installed with customer supplied power and cooling connected
GETTING STARTED
10 Product Delivery Instructions
11 Damage in Transportation
12 MR System Shipping and Storage Require-

ments
13 Non-English Label Installation
14
15 Required Tools
16 Before starting installation, complete Lock

Out Tag Out (LOTO)
POSITIONING OF EQUIPMENT
17 In Cabinet Positioning, complete Cabi- Complete Install Blower Box on Penetration

net Installation Requirements through Panel
Install Penetration Panel in RF Screen
Room Opening
Getting Started
Installation flowchart continued

Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
18 In Operator Workspace, complete Op-

erator Workspace Table Anchor Instal-
lation and GOC Installation
CABLE AND SYSTEM INSTALLATION
19 Move lean cable carts into designated

rooms Sorting Cables
20 Rear Magnet Enclosure Cable Cover Test-Fit
21 Cryogen Line Positioning on Magnet
22 Route gradient cables in equipment Route gradient cables in magnet room DO

room DO NOT CONNECT at this time. NOT CONNECT at this time. Route gradi-
Route gradient cables in overhead ca- ent cables in overhead cable tray on
ble tray on page 121 page 145
23 Route ground cables DO NOT Route and connect magnet ground cable
CONNECT at this time.6.13 Route and 6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run
connect ground cables on page 168 M4005 on page 162
24 Route power cables DO NOT Position rear pedestal at back of magnet

CONNECT at this time.6.14 Route and 6.11 Position rear pedestal on page 163
connect equipment room power ca-
bles on page 170
25 Route all cables to designated end Route all cables to designated end points
points between cabinets, SPW, and OW. PEN Panel, SPW, and magnet & rear pedes-
DO NOT CONNECT at this time. Over- tal components. DO NOT CONNECT at this
head Cables, RF Cables, Data Cables, time. Overhead Cables, RF Cables, Data Ca-
OW Cables bles
26 Move cabinets to final position PEN

cabinet and PGR cabinet
27 Complete PDU set-up in PGR cabinet

5.1 PGR/PDU setup on page 73
28 Connect ONLY the ground and power

cables. Refer to Route and Connect
Ground Cables, Route and Connect
Equipment Room Power Cables and
Power and Ground Connections
Getting Started

Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
29 Perform Ground Resistance Checks. In-

structions found on applicable Service
Methods DVD at Functional
Checks>Grounding & Leakage Cur-
rent>Ground Resistance Checks. This check
should be performed by customer supplied
licensed electrician.
30 In Gradient Cable Installation, complete In Gradient Cable Installation, complete

Equipment Room Gradient Cables for Magnet Room Gradient Cables for connec-
connection of cables between PGR cab- tion of cables between magnet and SPW.
inet and SPW.
31 In RF Transmit Cable Installation, com- In RF Transmit Cable Installation, complete

plete Route and connect in equipment Route and connect in magnet room for rout-
room for routing and connecting RF ca- ing and connecting RF cables in magnet
bles in equipment room room
32 Complete connection of cables in Complete connection of remaining cables in

equipment room. Refer to Route and magnet room. Refer to Route and Connect
Connect Equipment Room Data Cables Cables in Magnet Room
33 Complete connection of cables to oper-

ator workspace. Refer to Section 5 in
Operator Workspace
34 Complete the procedures in Install Air and

Water Hoses for both the equipment and
magnet rooms
35 Complete the procedures in Install Fiber Op-

tic Cables for both the operator workspace,
equipment room and magnet room
36 Complete Pneumatic Patient Alert Installa-

tion
37 Complete remaining installation proce-

dures in Operator Workspace
Getting Started

Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
38 Complete Install Temperature/Humidity For MR450w GEM,

Sensor Components on PEN Cabinet MR750w or MR750w GEM, complete the In
Room Display (IRD) and Sensor Bracket
Installation
For MR450w (non-GEM) complete either In
Room Display Installation OR LED
Display Installation
39 Complete Dock Installation
40 Complete Install RF Door Switch Run Complete Bridge & Rear Pedestal Installa-
E3014 tion
41 Complete LPCA Installation
42 Complete Emergency Off Connections Complete SRI Connections
43 Complete Route and Connect SPW Cables
44 Complete Route and Connect Penetration

Panel Cables
45 Complete MRU Installation. Refer to Mag-

net & Cryogen Subsystem manual for instal-
lation procedures.
46 Complete Installation of Magnet Enclosure

Rear Covers
47 Complete Coil and Dress Cable in PEN Panel

Closet
48 In 10.1 Completion checklist on page 357,

complete Mechanical Installation Comple-
tion Checklist
49 Complete Final Enclosure Installation
50 Complete Install Laser Alignment Light

Warning Label
51 Complete Install Patient Transport
52 Complete Returning Shipping Material
53 Complete Final Mechanical Installation

Steps
Getting Started

Completion
System
check
Step
System
Eq Mag
54 Complete GE Field Engineer Responsibilities
Mechanical Installation Complete
3.4.2 System start-up

Refer to the applicable Service Methods DVD for the following procedures:
1. Power On
2. LCD Monitor Screen Adjustments
3. Host Operating System Software Load
4. Either of the following:
• Class M procedures:
• Software Option Install with eLicense
• Installation Calibration Wizard
OR
• Class A and C procedures: Install Flow
5. Turn site over to Applications who will instruct the users
Cabinet Installation
Chapter 4 Cabinet Installation
4.1 Cabinet positioning

4.1.1 Cabinet installation requirements
Positioning of cabinets is critical for installing cables and post-installation system operation. Refer to
architectural site layouts for
• Location of all cabinets and related equipment.
• For seismic anchoring (where required)
• For crane rigging, contact your local field service engineer or Project Manager Installation, PMI.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO CABINETS
Equipment room cabinets must not be installed in an area with magnetic
fields higher than 50 gauss.
Refer to site layout plans for positioning of cabinets.
WARNING
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD
Cabinet weight.
Due to weight of cabinets, at least two people are required to move any
cabinet.
4.1.2 Cabinet positioning preparation

The following illustration shows a typical layout for the equipment room. For ease of cable installation in
overhead cable trays, it is recommended that cabinets NOT be positioned in final location until after
cables have been routed.
Figure 20 Initial positioning of cabinets
1. The HEC cabinet has already been positioned and installed prior to delivery of PEN and PGR
cabinets.
2. Refer to site layout drawings to determine location of PEN and PGR cabinets. Use the minimum
spacing distances as noted below, apply tape on floor to mark final location of front corners of
cabinets.
NOTE
The procedures for removing the dollies from the HEC cabinet and attaching them to
the PEN and PGR cabinets are provided in 4.1.4 Cabinet moving dollies on page 63
through 4.1.10 Final position of PEN cabinet on page 71.
3. Using the dollies, move PEN and PGR cabinets into temporary position in front of final location.
4.1.3 Removing components from top of PGR cabinet

If the PGR cabinet, with the brackets and covers attached to the top of cabinet, is too tall to go through
doorways, then these components will have to be removed. They will be reinstalled after cabinet is
placed in final position.
Figure 21 PGR cabinet bracket removal
1. Unfasten the four screws that attach the front cover to the cable bracket and remove cover.
2. Unfasten the five screws that attach the cable bracket to the top of the cabinet and remove
bracket.
3. If provided on cabinet, lift and remove the protective coolant hose covers. These will be reinstalled
after the coolant hoses are connected.
4.1.4 Cabinet moving dollies

The HEC cabinet has already been delivered to site and installed. The moving dollies that are required for
positioning the cabinets should have remained attached to the HEC cabinet.
• If dollies are not on site, they can be ordered online at www.umi-dollyshop.com
• For technical questions, contact: UMI, 1-800-638-7457
The dollies have the following features to aid in their use:

• Wheel Locking Pin - Keeps the wheels locked into a certain direction
• Parking Brakes - For holding the cabinet in position
• Slide and Lock - The dollies can be removed in limited space (15 inches or 380mm)
• Twinning Hardware - hardware to connect each dolly to the other dolly during transport without a
cabinet
Figure 22 Cabinet dollies
1. The dollies are designed with a slide and lock attachment plate. Slide the dolly until the cabinet
bushing lines up with the large opening on the attachment plate.
2. Remove each dolly.
NOTE
Dolly height may have to be adjusted to aid in the removal process.
3. Remove each bushing and place in attached dolly bag.
4. Attach the two dollies together using the twinning hardware, if desired.
5. Move dollies to next cabinet to be positioned.
4.1.5 Remove cabinets from shipping pallets

The PEN and PGR cabinets are delivered to site secured to pallets. The cabinets must be removed from
the pallets and positioned in equipment room according to site layout plans. The cabinet moving dollies
that were attached to the HEC cabinet, which was delivered and installed prior to magnet delivery, are
required to move the PEN and PGR cabinets off the pallets.
Figure 23 Securing dollies to cabinets
4.1.6 Move PGR cabinet into equipment room

NOTICE
The screws and brackets used to secure the cabinets to the pallets during
shipment of cabinets are also used to secure the cabinets to the floor at
sites requiring seismic support. DO NOT DISCARD BRACKETS AND
FASTENING SCREWS. Retain and save for customer.
Figure 24 Installation of bushings
1. Unfasten screws for each angle shipping bracket and remove bracket from each side of cabinet.
2. Install the six bushings, three on each side, to the bottom of the cabinet.
Figure 25 Position dollies on bushings
3. Maneuver the dolly so that all three bushings slip into the slide lock on the attachment plate.
4. Slide the dolly sideways to position the bushings in the lifting part of the attachment plate.
Figure 26 Secure dollies to cabinet
5. Raise the dolly by turning the jack screw clockwise. This will lock the dolly into position.
6. Secure to dollies with strap. Make sure the strap goes through the slot of the attachment plate and
the clamp is on flat surface of dolly.
7. Tighten strap and close clamp.
8. Lift cabinet off of pallet by turning the jack screw clockwise until the cabinet surface is free from the
pallet surface.
NOTE
Alternate raising each dolly in 1/4 inch (6mm) increments until the cabinet is above
the pallet.
Figure 27 Final placement of cabinet
9. Slide the pallet out from under the cabinet.

10. Lower the cabinet by turning the jack screw counter-clockwise until the cabinet is about 1 inch
(25mm) above the floor.
NOTE
Alternate lowering each side of cabinet.
11. Move the cabinet into the equipment room.
12. Refer to 4.1.2 Cabinet positioning preparation on page 61 for preliminary placement of cabinet and
lower cabinet into position.
NOTE
Cabinet will be moved to its final position after cables have been routed overhead.
13. Remove dollies for attachment to PEN cabinet.
4.1.7 Move PEN cabinet into equipment room

Repeat the steps in 4.1.6 Move PGR cabinet into equipment room on page 65 for removing the PEN
cabinet from the shipping pallet and moving it to the temporary position in the Equipment Room.
4.1.8 Install penetration panel in RF screen room opening

NOTE
It is recommended that the following steps be completed after routing of cables in
overhead cable trays.
Figure 28 Initial position of PEN cabinet
1. Move PEN cabinet to within 6 inches (152mm, +/- 25mm) of framed opening in RF room wall.
NOTE
The SPW was previously installed.
2. Unfasten Penetration Panel from rear of cabinet.
3. Install and secure Penetration Panel into open frame using 20 M5 x 16mm SS Hex screws and 20
M5 SS Flat Washers.
NOTE
The fasteners were delivered to site earlier with the SPW installation.
Figure 29 Install PEN panel
4.1.9 Disconnect cables

Before moving the PEN Cabinet to its final position, the following steps need to be completed.
Figure 30 Cable disconnection requirements
1. (For SRPS Only) The SRPS J50 Dongle terminator (5172838-2) should have been delivered with the
unit. The terminator should be pre-installed on magnet room side of PEN panel at J50. make sure
terminator is installed at J50.
2. On the PEN panel, disconnect cables at J93, J95, and J96 of the dynamic disable filter module.
3. On the back of the driver module, disconnect same cables as above step at J22 (BD2), J24 (BD3),
and J25 (BD4). Discard cables.
4.1.10 Final position of PEN cabinet

NOTICE
FOR SRPS ONLY: Before moving PEN Cabinet into position, make sure above
cables are disconnected and the SRPS J50 Dongle terminator is installed at
J50.
Figure 31 Final position of PEN cabinet
1. Move PEN cabinet to within 2 inches (50mm, +/- 25mm) of framed opening, position cabinet and
lower into place.
NOTE
Rear of cabinet must be positioned as close as possible to frame of Pen Panel.
2. Remove cabinet moving dollies. Refer to dolly removal steps in 4.1.4 Cabinet moving dollies on
page 63.
4.1.11 Final position of PGR cabinet

The final positioning of the cabinet is recommended after all the cables have been routed in the
overhead cable trays.
Figure 32 Positioning PGR cabinet
1. If dollies are not attached to cabinet, re-attach moving dollies to each side of cabinet
2. Lift and move cabinet to final position as indicated by site layout drawings.
4.1.12 Return moving dollies

Moving dollies must be returned for use on future shipments.
Figure 33 Secure dollies to pallet
1. Secure dollies to one of the pallets used for shipping cabinets to site.
2. Call Tech-Trans at 1-800-851-9929 to make arrangements for return of dollies for next shipment.
NOTE
For sites outside of the United States or Canada, re-use or dispose of dollies per the local
requirements.
PGR Cabinet PDU Setup
Chapter 5 PGR Cabinet PDU Setup
5.1 PGR/PDU setup

5.1.1 Input voltage selection
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD
Lethal voltages are present in the PGR/PDU gradient cabinet
Lock out and tag out the power at the main disconnect before proceeding.
Refer to LOTO for the Main Disconnect Panel (MDP).
The PDU is shipped with the default voltage setting of 480 VAC.
Figure 34 Remove cover plate
1. Using a voltmeter or other voltage indicating device, check to be sure that no voltage is being
applied to the input of the PDU.
2. Remove the plate from the front of the PDU marked INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT.
Figure 35 Power wire connections to terminal
3. For each of the three phases, be sure the wire is connected to the proper terminal for the actual
input voltage at the site and that the terminal screw is tight to make a good connection.
4. If the power connections are not configured properly, make sure that the proper personnel correct
the wiring connection. See Teal PDU Installation and Maintenance Manual for additional details.
5.1.2 System power connections

All power connections to the Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) and other components should be completed
by customer supplied licensed electrician.
• Runs E3030, E0009, M3030, and E4002 are GE supplied. All other wiring is customer supplied.
• All circuits require ground wires.
Figure 36 Power wiring diagram
Cable and System Installation
Chapter 6 Cable and System Installation
6.1 Overview of system components

The illustration below represents a typical layout for a GEM or non-GEM system. The procedures on the
following pages of this section will provide information on installing cables and completing the
attachment of components to the magnet.
Figure 37 Room layout
6.2 Cable map interconnects

Select the applicable equipment room and magnet room cable map from the following pages for the
system installed at the site. Maps with a slash (/) indicate the number of channels supported by the
system and by the patient table. For example, 32/32 indicates a system with 32 channels and a patient
table of 32 channels.
• MR450w installation interconnect maps
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & LED Display - Equipment &
Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & LED Display - Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Equipment &
Control Rooms
• 32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Equipment & Control
Rooms
• 32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Equipment &
Control Rooms
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & LED Display - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & LED Display - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Magnet Room
• 32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD - Magnet Room
• 32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Magnet Room
• 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS, IRD & P ports - Magnet Room
• 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS, IRD & P ports - Magnet Room
• 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS, IRD & Pports & ICE – Magnet Room
• MR450w GEM installation interconnect maps

• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS - Equipment & Control Rooms
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM with ICE / SIGNA Artist T Installation Interconnect Map - Equipment
& Control Rooms
• 96 or 128 Channel SIGNA Artist or Artist XT Installation Interconnect Map - Equipment &
Control Rooms
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS - Magnet Room
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS - Magnet Room
• 32 Channel MR450w GEM with ICE / SIGNA Artist T Installation Interconnect Map - Magnet
Room
• 96 or 128 Channel SIGNA Artist or Artist XT Installation Interconnect Map - Magnet Room
• SIGNA Artist Installation Interconnect Map- Equipment & Control Rooms- T5820
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & LED Display– Equipment & Control Rooms
Facility Power Filters
OW1 (Customer Supplied)
OW-GOC
[Brown] 3 Older GOCs only E-Off
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB RJ45 SPW
Port A Ethernet Port 1 Port Ethernet Port Service Laptop RF Door [Yellow/Green]
E3014
Port Ethernet Site Network Switch
MODEM E3045 RS232
Port Ethernet AW (option) J18/J115 M3030
(Option)
Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023
Converter E3019 FJ7 E3018

KEYBOARD E3048 CRY
E3019 [Orange/Green] F1
F2
Mntr 2 E3025 JR JC 623 624
F3
MOUSE 5267721-2
Sensor Cable iButton E0009 Power F4
HOST E3046 Mntr 1

Gas Supply 621 J110 Waveguide 621
DISPLAY Gas Return 622 J111Waveguide 622

Port B
GOCAA E3016 FJ5 E3017
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
Line Out J14 Water Return
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND X X
Stud OW1-PDM
E3317 Gradient M3317
E3318 Y Filter Y M3318
Spare J11 J12 Spare
E3319 or E3419 Z Z M3319
Modem Power J9 J10 IRDC Power (option)
Spare J7 J8 Spare
E0015 Host Display J5 J6 Hub Power
Patient Alert Box J3 J4 Host Power
E0003 J1 J2 GOCAA Power
From PGR)
M3309
Facility HEC [Green] J122 M1305

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HO SE
IN Pwr J128 M1002
YELLOW YEL HOSE J106 M1001

Power Box
BLUE BLU HOSE J100 Waveguide
Facility
Water Facility Supply BLK BLK HOSE J101 Waveguide
Supply
Supply AIR HOSE J104 Waveguide
Facility Air
Return AIR HOSE J105 Waveguide
Water Facility Return Filter
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
RS232 J11 E4009 GND RF Common
M4005 GND
FJ4 CAT-5 J12 E4010 GND Ground Stud
E3026 J24 FL/TEMP GRN
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
E3024 J9 J7 Interface
J8
To Site E3034 J5 MON GND
Ethernet [Green/Red] Sensor Stud
iButton
Cable
Customer 2 TR/DD
Supplied Power J10 E3020
Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
E4008 GND
(X) J43 J42 M3314
CB1
G/PE
(Y) J39 M3303

E3029 Customer Supplied
(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 G ND
J54 M3315
E4005 GND
J36 M3311
E4002 G ND
PHPS2
J9
GND J10 Cabinet
Stud J18 E1002 Head Tx Interface Exciter
TB1-15-16 J34 M3316
J19 E1001 Body Tx
J21 J18 J32 M1303
CB3 J17 1 J30 M1304

1 J22 E2020 6 F/O
J29 M1302
CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 Patient Alert J20

To OW1-PDM-J3 F/O Waveguide
Control Box
REV 14.0
P2003 6 F/O
1 J15
1 M2025 4 F/O
1 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 1
J4 E3008 J9
Sensor J5 E3006 J14 eSRPS
2 iButton Cable J3
J8 E3009 J3 J111
PEM J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J112 M3375
J11 E1005 J15
J12 E1003 Body TR J5
J13 E1004 Head TR J6
80
J16 E0004 J1
Interconnects Numbering Legend Symbol Legend
First Character (one-digit alpha): Ball Valve Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room 1
Check Valve routing an d conn ecting fiber optics in cab inets.
DIRECTION 5670002
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room

Depen dent on system d elivered to site, complete o ne of the follo win g
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room 2
proced ures:
Subsequent Characters: • On systems with XG D only, the iButto n a nd the Se nso r Cable
• 0xxxx AC Power & Ground are to b e i nstalled an d conn ected to J43 on PHPS 2 modu le.
• 1xxxx Coax/RF • On systems with XG 2 o nly, con nect the i Button to the pre viou sly
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics installed sensor cabl e conn ected to J3 on th e P EM modu le.
• 3xxxx Signal
3 The GOC hub/switch is only in clud ed on older GOCs. For newer
• 4xxxx Other
GO Cs, the Eth ernet port on the Host PC is a vai lable fo r d irect
connection to service la pto p, site network, AW o pti on, or customer
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option supplie d switch (if multiple connections a re r equire d).
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & LED Display– Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
[Brown] E-Off
To MS4 (MRU)
4 Older GOCs only E3030
Switch
SPW
HUB RJ45 RF Door
Port A Ethernet Port 1 Port Ethernet Port Service Laptop E3014
[Yellow/Green]
Port Switch
Ethernet Site Network
MODEM E3045 RS232
(Option) Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023

KEYBOARD E3048 CRY
F2
Mntr 2 E3025 JR JC 623 624
F3
MOUSE 5267721-2
Sensor Cable iButton E0009 Power F4
HOST E3046 Mntr 1


Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND X X
Stud OW1-PDM
E3317 Gradient M3317
Spare J11 J12 Spare
E3319 or E3419 Z Z M3319
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HO SE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer 3 TR/DD
Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
E4008 GND
(X) J43 J42 M3314
CB1
G/PE
(Y) J39 M3303

(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 G ND
J54 M3315
E4005 GND
J36 M3311
E4002 G ND
PHPS2
J9
GND J10 Cabinet
TB1-15-16 J34 M3316
J19 E1001 Body Tx
J21 J18 J32 M1303
CB3 J17 2 J30 M1304

2 J22 E2020 6 F/O
J29 M1302
CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 Patient Alert

To OW1-PDM-J3 J20 F/O Waveguide
Control Box
REV 14.0
P2003 6 F/O
2 J15
2 M2025 4 F/O
2 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 2
J4 E3008 J9 SRPS
J5 E3006 J14 J52 M3301
Sensor
3 iButton Cable J3 J8 E3009 J3 J51 M3300
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J45 M3310
PEM
J11 E1005 J15 J46 M3306
Symbol Legend J12 E1003 Body TR J5 J47 M3308
J13 E1004 Head TR J6 J48 M3304
81
Ball Valve J16 E0004 J1

Check Valve J50 1
Interconnects Numbering Legend

1 Terminator applie d a t J5 0 o f Pene tration Pa nel.
First Character (one-digit alpha): Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on
2
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room routing an d conn ecting fiber optics in cab inets.
DIRECTION 5670002

proced ures:
• 3xxxx Signal The GOC hub/switch is only in clud ed on older GOCs. For newer
4
• 4xxxx Other GO Cs, the Eth ernet port on the Host PC is a vai lable fo r d irect
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD– Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB RJ45 SPW
E3014
MODEM E3045 RS232 Port Ethernet AW (option) J18/J115 M3030
(Option) Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023

KEYBOARD E3048 CRY
J2 J4 F2
Mntr 2 DVI-D E3025 JR JC 623 624
F3
MOUSE USB J1 IRD J5 Sensor Cable iButton E0009 Power F4
J3
HOST E3046 Mntr 1

Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Stud OW1-PDM Gradient M3317
Spare J11 J12 Spare E3319 or E3419 Z Z M3319
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HO SE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer 2 TR/DD
P2026 (IRD)

Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
(X) J43 J42 M3314

CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
(Y) J39 M3303
(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 GND
J54 M3315
E4005 GND
J36 M3311
E4002 G ND
PHPS2
J9
GND J10 Cabinet
TB1-15-16 J34 M3316
J19 E1001 Body Tx
J21 J18 J32 M1303
CB3 J17 J30 M1304

1 J22 E2020 6 F/O 1
J29 M1302
Control Box
REV 14.0
P2003 6 F/O
1 J15
P2026 4 F/O
1 M2025 4 F/O
1 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 1
J4 E3008 J9
J5 E3006 J14 eSRPS
2 iButton
Sensor
J3 J8 E3009 J3 J111
Cable
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J112 M3375
PEM J11 E1005 J15
J13 J6
82
E1004 Head TR
J16 E0004 J1

Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on
First Character (one-digit alpha): Ball Valve 1
routing an d conn ecting fiber optics in cab inets.
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room Check Valve
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room Depen dent on system d elivered to site, complete o ne of the follo win g
DIRECTION 5670002
2
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room proced ures:
• On systems with XG 2 o nly, con nect the i Button to the pre viou sly
• 1xxxx Coax/RF installed sensor cabl e conn ected to J3 on th e P EM modu le.
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics
3
• 4xxxx Other
supplie d switch (if multiple connections a re r equire d).
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD– Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB
SPW
RJ45 RF Door
Port A Ethernet Port 1 Port Ethernet Port Service Laptop E3014
[Yellow/Green]
MODEM E3045 RS232
(Option)
Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023

KEYBOARD E3048 CRY
J2 J4 F2
F3
J3
HOST E3046 Mntr 1

Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HO SE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer 3 TR/DD
P2026 (IRD)

Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
(X) J43 J42 M3314

CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
(Y) J39 M3303

(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 G ND
J54 M3315
E4005 G ND
J36 M3311
E4002 G ND
PHPS2
J9
GND J10 Cabinet
TB1-15-16 J34 M3316
J19 E1001 Body Tx
J21 J18 J32 M1303
CB3 J17 J30 M1304

2 J22 E2020 6 F/O 2
J29 M1302
CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 Patient Alert J20

To OW1-PDM-J3 F/O Waveguide
Control Box
REV 14.0
P2003 6 F/O
2 J15
P2026 4 F/O
2 M2025 4 F/O
2 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 2
J4 E3008 J9 SRPS
J5 E3006 J14 J52 M3301
Sensor
3 iButton J3 J8 E3009 J3 J51 M3300
Cable
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J45 M3310
PEM
J11 E1005 J15 J46 M3306
J13 E1004 Head TR J6 J48 M3304
83

Check Valve J50 1

First Character (one-digit alpha): Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on routing
2
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room and conne cting fi ber optics in cab inets.
DIRECTION 5670002
3
installed sensor cabl e conn ected to J3 on th e P EM modu le.
• 3xxxx Signal 4
The GOC hub/switch is only in clud ed on older GOCs. For newer GOCs,
• 4xxxx Other the Eth ernet p ort on the Ho st P C is a vail able fo r di rect co nnectio n to
service lap top , si te network, AW o ptio n, or customer supplied switch (if
multiple co nnecti ons are re quired) .
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB RJ45 SPW
E3014
MODEM E3045 RS232
(Option) Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
KEYBOARD E3048
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023

CRY
E3019 [Orange/Green]
MOUSE F1
J2 J4 F2
F3
USB J1 IRD J5 iButton
HOST E3046 Mntr 1 Sensor Cable E0009 Power F4
DISPLAY J3
Port B
Gas Return 622 J111Waveguide 622
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118
M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HO SE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer TR/DD
P2026 (IRD)
Supplied Power J10 E3020 CFB

Filter
Outlet J7/J8
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10 J43 J42 M3314
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13 J39 M3303
USB J20 E3014 J35 M3313
E3037
Hub J41 M3312
(X)
CB1
J40
G/PE
M3302
E4008 GND
(Y) J54 M3315
(Z) J36
M3311
PHPS2
MDP E4007 GND
E4005 GND Exciter
E4002 G ND J19 J34 M3316
J9 J32 M1303
GND J10 Cabinet
Stud J30 M1304
J18 E1002 Head Tx Interface J29
TB1-15-16 J19 E1001 Body Tx
ICE 1 J21 J18 1 Splitter
CB3 J29 J22 E2020 6 F/O J17 J1
J38/J39 J300 E1307 J16 J3 J2 M1302
CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1
Patient Alert
To OW1-PDM-J3
1 Control Box
REV 14.0
P2003 6 F/O
J31/J32 J15
P2026 4 F/O
J20 1 M2025 4 F/O
1 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 1 F/O Waveguide
J4 E3008 J9
J5 E3006 J14 eSRPS
2 iButton
Sensor
J3 J8 E3009 J3 J111
Cable
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J112 M3375
PEM J11 E1005 J15
Symbol Legend J12 E1003 Body TR J5
J13 J6
84
E1004 Head TR
Check Valve

Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on
First Character (one-digit alpha): 1
routing an d conn ecting fiber optics in cab inets.
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room
DIRECTION 5670002

2
• 3xxxx Signal 3
32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD– Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB RJ45 SPW
E3014
MODEM E3045 RS232
(Option)
Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023

KEYBOARD E3048 CRY
J2 J4 F2
F3
J3
HOST E3046 Mntr 1

Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J11 J12 Spare
E3319 or E3419 Z Z M3319
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HOSE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
RS232 J11 E4009 G ND RF Common
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer 2 TR/DD
P2026 (IRD)

Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
J43 J42 M3314

(X)
CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
(Y) J39 M3303

(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 GND
J54 M3315
E4005 GND
J36 M3311
E4002 GND
PHPS2
J9
GND J10 Cabinet
TB1-15-16 J34 M3316
J19 E1001 Body Tx
J21 E2023 2 F/O 32 CH J18 J32 M1303
CB3 1
J17 1 J30 M1304
J22 E2020 6 F/O
J29 M1302
Control Box
J14 P2004 6 F/O (32 Ch. Only)
REV 14.0
1
J15 P2003 6 F/O
P2026 4 F/O
1 M2025 4 F/O
1 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 1
J4 E3008 J9
J5 eSRPS
Sensor E3006 J14
2 iButton J3 J8 J111
Cable E3009 J3
PEM J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J112 M3375
J11 E1005 J15
Symbol Legend J12 E1003 Body TR J5
85

Check Valve
First Character (one-digit alpha): 1

Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on routing
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room and conne cting fi ber optics in cab inets.
DIRECTION 5670002
2
• On systems with XG 2 o nly, con nect the i Button to the pre viou sly
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 3xxxx Signal 3
32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD– Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB RJ45 SPW
E3014
(Option) Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3019 FJ7 E3018 E3023 J117 M3023
Converter CRY
KEYBOARD E3048 E3019 [Orange/Green] F1
J2 J4 F2
F3
J3
HOST E3046 Mntr 1

Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J11 J12 Spare
E3319 or E3419 Z Z M3319
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HO SE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer 3 TR/DD
P2026 (IRD)

Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 [Red] J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
J43 J42 M3314

(X)
CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
(Y) J39 M3303

(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 GND
J54 M3315
E4005 GND
J36 M3311
E4002 G ND
PHPS2
J9
GND J10 Cabinet
TB1-15-16 J34 M3316
J19 E1001 Body Tx
J21 E2023 2 F/O 32 CH J18 J32 M1303
CB3 2
J17 2 J30 M1304
J22 E2020 6 F/O
J29 M1302
Control Box
J14 P2004 6 F/O (32 Ch. Only)
REV 14.0
2
J15 P2003 6 F/O
P2026 4 F/O
3 M2025 4 F/O
2 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 2
J4 E3008 J9 SRPS
Sensor
J5 E3006 J14 J52 M3301
3 iButton Cable J3 J8 E3009 J3 J51 M3300
PEM J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J45 M3310
J11 E1005 J15 J46 M3306

J13 E1004 Head TR J6 J48 M3304
86

J50 1
Check Valve
Interconnects Numbering Legend 1 Terminator applie d a t J5 0 o f Pene tration Pa nel.
First Character (one-digit alpha): 2 Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room routing an d conn ecting fiber optics in cab inets.
DIRECTION 5670002
3
• 3xxxx Signal The GOC hub/switch is only in clud ed on older GOCs. For newer GOCs,
4
32/0 or 32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Equipment & Control Rooms
OW-GOC
To MS4 (MRU)
E3030
Switch
HUB RJ45
SPW
E3014
(Option) Port 7
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
KEYBOARD E3048 E3023 J117 M3023
USB-RS422
CRY
MOUSE E3019 [Orange/Green] F1
J2 J4 F2
F3
HOST E3046 USB J1 IRD J5 Sensor Cable iButton
Mntr 1 E0009 Power F4
DISPLAY
J3
Port B Gas Supply 621 J110 Waveguide 621

Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J11 J12 Spare
E3319 or E3419 Z Z M3319
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309

Utilities J123 J121
CRY Pwr J120 M1306
GREY GRY HOSE
IN Pwr J128 M1002

Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
RS232 J11 E4009 G ND RF Common
M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
[Yellow]
J8
iButton
Cable
Customer TR/DD
P2026 (IRD)
Filter
Outlet J7/J8
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J96/J76
RED Stud
RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
PGR J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
[Red] J3 E3028 J13 J43 J42 M3314
E3037 USB
Hub J20 E3014 J39 M3303
E3011 J2 J35 M3313
(X)
CB1
J41
G/PE
E4008 GND M3312

(Y) J40 M3302

(Z) J54 M3315

J36 M3311
MDP E4007 GND PHPS2
E4005 GND
E4002 GND Exciter
J9 J19 J34 M3316
GND J10 Cabinet
Stud J32 M1303
J18 E1002 Head Tx Interface J30 M1304
TB1-15-16 J19 E1001 Body Tx J29
1 J21 E2023 2 F/O 32 CH J18 1
CB3 J22 E2020 6 F/O J17 Splitter
J16 J3 J1
CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 ICE J300 E1307
J2 M1302
J29
Patient Alert J20
J38/J39
REV 14.0
To OW1-PDM-J3
1 J14 Control Box
J31/J32 J15 P2003 6 F/O
P2026 4 F/O
1 M2025 4 F/O
1 J1 E2002 2 F/O J19 1
J4 F/O Waveguide
E3008 J9
Sensor J5
iButton Cable J3 E3006 J14
J8 E3009 J3
PEM
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11
J11 E1005 J15 eSRPS
J12 E1003 Body TR J5 J111
J13 J6
87
E1004 Head TR
J112 M3375
J16 E0004 J1
First Character (one-digit alpha): Ball Valve

DIRECTION 5670002
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room
Subsequent Characters:
Refer to In stall Fi ber Optic Cables se ction fo r de tai l instructio ns on routing
• 0xxxx AC Power & Ground 1
and conne cting fi ber optics in cab inets.
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics 2
• 3xxxx Signal the Eth ernet p ort on the Ho st P C is a vail able fo r di rect co nnectio n to
• 4xxxx Other service lap top , si te network, AW o ptio n, or customer supplied switch (if

16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & LED Display – Magnet Room
Facility Power Filters MS4 Magnet
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
(Customer Supplied) MS1
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
M3022 P403 (Terminal Box) (Magnet)
Chimney
SPW E-Off [Blue] MG3 TB1
MS1 A5 A2
[Yellow/Green] (Pressure (Reed Switch)
E3030 J18/J115 M3030 Transducer)
PreAmp J9 (PAC 5 Only)
E3022 J116 M3360 J2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 J1
M2025-C
F1 J4 MAG-PAC
623 F2 M4005 GND MAG Ground Stud 832
F3
F4 624 Power Coldhead MAG-BORE
621 J110 Waveguide 621 MS1 A2 Sleve
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
622 J111Waveguide 622 Return
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3317 X Gradient X M3317 X X
E3318 Y Filter Y M3318 Y Y
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
BLU J100 Waveguide BLU MAG-Grad Coil
BLK J101 Waveguide BLK MAG-Grad Coil
AIR HOSE J104 Waveguide 1.5" AIR Gradient Coil Air
4" AIR HOSE
1.5" AIR Gradient Coil Air
AIR HOSE J105 Waveguide
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
J123 J121 IN MAG-AMP OUT
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002

RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9 J21 M1314 J7 (Front)
MAG- J9
DDSPLIT J11 RT-CNTL
E3031 J118
J11 LFT-CNTL Air Temp
Sensor
RF Common Ground Stud
J4 LED J5 M3363
M3354
PEN M3349 J5 J10 M3350 Bore Temp Sensor
[Yellow] MAG M3337 J4 J22 M3344 Bore Light (Front)
TR/DD Filter (Mag I/O) Bore Light (Rear)
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
J93/J73 J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J94/J74 J24 Airflow Sensor
J95/J75 J32 M3345 Front Microphone
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
M2025-A J13/J14 3" AIR Patient Air
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 J2 MAG- Dock

DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
J11
F/O Waveguide
J28
J21
P2003 6 F/O J20
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
REV 14.0
MAG-TDM
J1 J2
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
4" AIR HOSE
88
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103
Slot 11 J8 J104
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
DIRECTION 5670002
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16

J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17
J34 M3316 Slot 11 J10 PED-MTR
M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J112 Slot 12 J1
M3375
PED-TIF J3
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
Rear Pedestal Air LPCA
Interconnects Numbering Legend Rear Microphone
First Character (one-digit alpha): M1305 J1 to P-Port PED-

• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room M1306 J2 to A-Port I/O Rear Pedestal
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room [Blue/Red]
• 0xxxx AC Power & Ground
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 3xxxx Signal Symbol Legend
• 4xxxx Other E1006 J107
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option J108 Ball Valve Check Valve
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & LED Display – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
PPG
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
PreAmp J9 (PAC 5 Only)
E3022 J116 M3360 J2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 J1
M2025-C
F1 J4 MAG-PAC
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002

RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9 J21 M1314 J7 (Front)
MAG- J9
DDSPLIT J11 RT-CNTL
E3031 J118
J11 LFT-CNTL Air Temp
Sensor
RF Common Ground Stud
J4 LED J5 M3363
M3354
PEN M3349 J5 J10 M3350 Bore Temp Sensor
[Yellow] MAG M3337 J4 J22 M3344 Bore Light (Front)
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
J93/J73 J1 J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
M3031 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
M2025-A J13/J14 3" AIR Patient Air
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (Option) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 J2 MAG- Dock

DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
J11
F/O Waveguide
J28
J21
P2003 6 F/O J20
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
REV 14.0
MAG-TDM
J1 J2
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J51 M3300 J9
J52 M3301 J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
4" AIR HOSE
89
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103
Slot 11 J8 J104
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
DIRECTION 5670002
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16

J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17
M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
J45 M3310 Slot 12 J4 J2
J46 M3306 Slot 12 J1 M3358
J47 M3308 Slot 12 J6 PED-TIF J3
J48 M3304 Slot 12 J2 J6 M3355
1 Slot 12 J3 J5 M3351
J50 2 J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics 1 Shunt is installed for 16 & 32 Channel systems.
2 Terminator applied at J50 of Penetration Panel.
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606 ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3022 J116 PreAmp J9 (PAC 5 Only)
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F1 M2025-C J1 MAG-PAC
623 F2 M4005 GND MAG Ground Stud 832 J4
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
1. 5" AIR Gradient Coil Air
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
E3031 J118 M1310 J9 J21 M1314 J7 (Front)
MAG- J9
DDSPLIT Air Temp
RF Common Ground Stud Sensor
M3354
PEN J5 J10 M3350 Bore Temp Sensor
[Yellow] MAG J22 M3344 Bore Light (Front)
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
M2025-A J13/J14 J4 M3337 3" AIR Patient Air
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 MAG- Dock

F/O
IRD DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
MAG- LDP
P2026 F/O (IRD) J11 Trackball J11
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
F/O Waveguide Trackball
J28
J21
P2003 6 F/O J20
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
REV 14.0
J1 J2
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
4" AIR HOSE
90
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103
Slot 11 J8 J104
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
Bulb
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
E3031 J118 M1310 J9 J21 M1314 J7 (Front)
MAG- J9
DDSPLIT Air Temp
M3354
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
J93/J73 J1 J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
M3031 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 MAG- Dock

F/O
IRD DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28
J21
P2003 6 F/O J20
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
REV 14.0
J1 J2
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J51 M3300 J9
J52 M3301 J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
4" AIR HOSE
91
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103
Slot 11 J8 J104
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
J45 M3310 Slot 12 J4 J2
J46 M3306 Slot 12 J1 M3358
J48 M3304 Slot 12 J2 J6 M3355
1 Slot 12 J3 J5 M3351
J50 2 J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics 1 Shunt is installed for 16 & 32 Channel systems.
2 Terminator applied at J50 of Penetration Panel.
16/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
Bulb
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
E3031 J118 M1310 J9 J21 M1314 J7 (Front)
MAG- J9
DDSPLIT Air Temp
M3354
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 MAG- Dock

F/O
IRD DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28
J21
P2003 6 F/O J20
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J5 J1 M3320
J8 (not used) J4
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
REV 14.0
J1 J2
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
4" AIR HOSE
92
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103
Slot 11 J8 J104
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
1.5" AIR
Gradient Coil Air
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
J21 M1314 J7 (Front)
E3031 J118 MAG- J9
DDSPLIT
Air Temp
M3354
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 MAG- Dock

F/O
IRD DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28
P2004 6 F/O (32 Ch. Only) J21 J4/J5 RX2 J2
(32 CH
P2003 6 F/O J20 J1
Option) J7
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
REV 14.0
J1 J2 M3368
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower 4" AIR HOSE
93
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103 M3322
Slot 11 J8 J104 M3323
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS & IRD – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
AIR HOSE J104 Waveguide 4" AIR HOSE
1.5" AIR
Gradient Coil Air
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
E3031 J118 MAG- J9
DDSPLIT
Air Temp
M3354
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 MAG- Dock

F/O
IRD DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28
(32 CH
P2003 6 F/O J20 J1
Option) J7
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
REV 14.0
J1 J2 M3368
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J51 M3300 J9
J52 M3301 J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower 4" AIR HOSE
94
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103 M3322
Slot 11 J8 J104 M3323
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
J45 M3310 Slot 12 J4 J2
J46 M3306 Slot 12 J1 M3358
J48 M3304 Slot 12 J2 J6 M3355
1 Slot 12 J3 J5 M3351
J50 2 J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 3xxxx Signal Symbol Legend 1 Shunt is installed for 16 & 32 Channel systems.
• 4xxxx Other E1006 J107 2 Terminator applied at J50 of Penetration Panel.

32/0 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS & IRD & ICE – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
1.5" AIR
Gradient Coil Air
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
E3031 J118 MAG- J9
DDSPLIT
Air Temp
M3354
[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J111 (not used)
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351
J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 (O ption) J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 MAG- Dock

F/O
IRD DCK_L [Blue/
Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28 J4 (not RX2

used) J2
(32 CH
P2003 6 F/O J20 J5 J1
Option) J7
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J5 J1 M3320
J8 (not used) J4
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
REV 14.0
J1 J2 M3368
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower 4" AIR HOSE
95
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103 M3322
Slot 11 J8 J104 M3323
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
J4
M1335 Slot 1 B1
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS, IRD & Pports – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
AIR HO SE J104 Waveguide 1.5" AIR Gradient Coil Air
4" AIR HOSE
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
MAG- J9
E3031 J118
DDSPLIT
Air Temp
Sensor
RF Common Ground Stud M3354

[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
MAG-
Dock
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 [Blue/
IRD DCK_L
F/O Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28
(32 CH
P2003 6 F/O J20 J1
Option) J7
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
J1 J2 M3368
REV 14.0
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315

J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

Blower 4" AIR HOSE M3371
M3372
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10
96
PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103 M3322
Slot 11 J8 J104 M3323
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
Slot 1 B1 J4
Rear Pedestal Air
M1335 J7 P3A M1330
M3354 J10 P3B M1331
Interconnects Numbering Legend P4A M1332
PED- P4B M1333
First Character (one-digit alpha): RBOX J9 M3373
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room LPCA
M1305 J1 to P-Port PED- Rear Microphone
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room M1306 J2 to A-Port I/O
Subsequent Characters: Rear Pedestal
• 0xxxx AC Power & Ground [Blue/Red]
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with SRPS, IRD & Pports – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE 1.5" AIR
Gradient Coil Air
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
MAG- J9
E3031 J118
DDSPLIT
Air Temp
Sensor

[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
MAG-
Dock
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 [Blue/
IRD DCK_L
F/O Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28
(32 CH
P2003 6 F/O J20 J1
Option) J7
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J4/J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7
MAG-TDM
J1 J2 M3368
REV 14.0
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315

J51 M3300 J9
J52 M3301 J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

M3372
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10 PED-HUB
97
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103 M3322
Slot 11 J8 J104 M3323
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
J45 M3310 Slot 12 J4 J2
J46 M3306 Slot 12 J1 M3358
J48 M3304 Slot 12 J2 J6 M3355
1 Slot 12 J3 J5 M3351
J50 2 J4
Rear Pedestal Air
M1335 J7 P3A M1330
M3354 J10 P3B M1331
PED- P4B M1333
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics Shunt is installed for 16 & 32 Channel systems.
• 3xxxx Signal Symbol Legend 1
• 4xxxx Other E1006 J107 2 Terminator applied at J50 of Penetration Panel.

32/32 Channel MR450w 1.5T Interconnect Map with eSRPS, IRD & Pports & ICE – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Resp.
ECG
PPG
ERU/MRU MS1 A3 A1
Bulb
(MRU) Enclosure 606
Chimney
MS1 A5 A2
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 M3360 J2
F3
Supply
(Coldhead) XRMB
M3344 Grad Temp
Grad Buss Bar
E3319 Z Z M3319 or M3419 Z Z
Patient Alert Tube
4" AIR HOSE
E1001 J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24

M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
(N.C.) J120 M1306
E1002 J128 M1002
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
MAG- J9
E3031 J118
DDSPLIT
Air Temp
Sensor

[Blue] MAG-SRI
J92/J72
M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J96/J76 M3369 J21 J31 M3346
M3336 J1 J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
J13/J14 J4 M3337 3" AIR Patient Air
J111 (not used) M2025-A
J6 M2025-B J11/J12 J2 M3351

J41 M3312
J39 J3 J20 M3341 J1
M3303 J17 J2
J40 M3302 J4 J3 M3370
J35 M3313 J5 M3364 J3
MAG-
Dock
J42 M3314 J2 M3366 J1 [Blue/
IRD DCK_L
F/O Green]
MAG- LDP
MAG- RDP
P2026 F/O J11
J28 J4 (not RX2

J21 used) J2
(32 CH
P2003 6 F/O J20 J5 J1
Option) J7
FOI
(F/O IF) M2301 J9 RX1 J2 M3321
M2025 4 F/O J5 J1 M3320
J8
M3367 J7 (not used) J4
MAG-TDM
J1 J2 M3368
REV 14.0
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315

J9
J10
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
4" AIR HOSE

M3372
F5, F7, F9, F11

F6, F8, F10
98
PED-HUB
Slot 11 J7 J101
Slot 11 J4 J102
Slot 11 J3 J103 M3322
Slot 11 J8 J104 M3323
M2300 Slot 11 J13
Slot 11 J14/15 PED
M2025-D Antenna
J32 M1303 Slot 11 J16
DIRECTION 5670002
J30 M1304 Slot 11 J17

M3309 Slot 11 J9 J1
M3376 Slot 12 J3 J2
M3377 Slot 12 J2 M3358
J6 M3355
J5 M3351
J4
Rear Pedestal Air
M1335 J7 P3A M1330
M3354 J10 P3B M1331
PED- P4B M1333
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Installation Interconnect Map with eSRPS – Equipment & Control Rooms

OW1 E-Off (Customer Supplied)
E3030
OW-GOC Switch To MS4 (MRU)
[Brown] 2 Older GOCs only
RF Door SPW
HUB RJ45 E3014
Switch
Port A Ethernet Por t 1 Por t 2 Ethernet Port Service Laptop [Yellow/Green]
Por t Ethernet Site Network
MODEM E3045 RS232
Por t Ethernet AW (option) J18/J115 M3030
(Option) Por t
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023
Converter
E3019 FJ7 E3018
KEYBOARD E3019 CRY
[Orange/Green] F1
Mntr 2 J2 J4 E3025 JR JC 623
F2
624
MOUSE J1 IRDC J5 Sensor Cable iButton F3
E0009 Power F4
J3
HOST E3046
Mntr 1
Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J11 J12 Spare E3419 Z Z M3419
Modem Power J9 J10 Spare
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309
J122 M1305
Facility J123 J121

HEC [Green] J120 M1306
Utilities
CRY Pwr J128 M1002
IN Pwr GREY GRY HOSE J106 M1001
YEL HOSE
YELLOW
Power Box
Facility BLUE BLU HOSE J100 Waveguide
Supply
Facility Air
Water Facility Return Return AIR HO SE J105 Waveguide
Filter
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
J12 M4005 GND
FJ4 CAT-5 E4010 GND Ground Stud
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
M1312
[Yellow]
J8
Ethernet [Green/Red] Stud
Sensor
iButton
P2026 IRDC
Cable
Customer TR/DD
Supplied Power J10 E3020 1
Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
GND J94/J74 M1312
Stud
RED RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN GRN J12
E0003 J102 J6 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 J3 E3028 J13
J20 E3014
(X)
CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
J39
(Y) J43 M3303

(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 GND
J54 M3315
E4005 G ND
E4002 GND J36
J9 Cabinet PHPS2 M3311
GND J10 Interface
Stud J18 E1002 Head Tx Exciter
E1001 Body Tx
TB1-15-16 J19 (CH1) J34 M3316
J32 M1303
CB3 J21 E2023 2 F/O 32 CH J18 J30 M1304

J22 E2020 6 F/O J17 J29 M1302
PGR Patient Alert J20

CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 To OW1-PDM-J3
[Red] Control Box F/O Waveguide
M2025 4 F/O
J14 P2004 6 F/O 32 CH

REV 14.0
J15 P2003 6 F/O

J1 E2002 2 F/O J19
J4 E3008 (CAN) J9
1 iButton
Sensor
J3 J5 E3006 (HART) J14 eSRPS
Cable
J8 E3009 (UNBLANK) J3 J111 M3378
PEM J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J112 M3375
J11 E1005 Body Tx J15

99
J16 E0004 Power J1

DIRECTION 5670002

proced ures:
• 4xxxx Other 2
32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Installation Interconnect Map with SRPS – Equipment & Control Rooms

E3030
RF Door SPW
HUB RJ45 E3014
Switch
MODEM E3045 RS232
J18/J115 M3030
Por t Ethernet AW (option)
(Option) Por t
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023
Converter
E3019 FJ7 E3018
KEYBOARD E3019 CRY
[Orange/Green] F1
Mntr 2 J2 J4 E3025 JR JC 623
F2
624
MOUSE J1 IRDC J5 Sensor Cable iButton F3
E0009 Power F4
J3
HOST E3046
Mntr 1
Port B
Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309
J122 M1305
Facility J123 J121

Utilities
CRY Pwr J128 M1002
YEL HOSE
YELLOW
Power Box
Supply
Facility Air
Filter
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
J12 M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
M1312
[Yellow]
J8
Sensor
iButton
P2026 IRDC
Cable
Customer TR/DD
Supplied Power J10 E3020 2
Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
GND J94/J74 M1312
Stud
RED RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN GRN J12
E0003 J102 J6 E3013 J10
E3011 J2 J3 E3028 J13 J111 M3378
M1152
J20 E3014
(X)
CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
J39
(Y) J43 M3303

(Z) J35 M3313

J41 M3312
J40 M3302
MDP E4007 GND
J54 M3315
E4005 G ND
E4002 GND J36
J9 Cabinet PHPS2 M3311
GND J10 Interface
Stud J18 E1002 Head Tx Exciter
E1001 Body Tx
TB1-15-16 J19 (CH1) J34 M3316
J32 M1303
CB3 J21 E2023 2 F/O 32 CH J18 J30 M1304

J22 E2020 6 F/O J17 J29 M1302
PGR Patient Alert J20

CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 To OW1-PDM-J3
[Red] Control Box F/O Waveguide
M2025 4 F/O
J14 P2004 6 F/O 32 CH

REV 14.0
J15 P2003 6 F/O

J1 E2002 2 F/O J19
J4 E3008 (CAN) J9
Sensor SRPS
2 iButton J3 J5 E3006 (HART) J14
Cable
J8 E3009 (UNBLANK) J3 J52 M3301
PEM J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J51 M3300
J11 E1005 Body Tx J15 J45 M3310
J46 M3306
J12 E1003 Body TR J5 J47 M3308
J13 E1004 Head TR J6 J48 M3304
100
J16 E0004 Power J1

J50 1

DIRECTION 5670002

• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room Check Valve Depen dent on system d elivered to site, complete o ne of the follo win g
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room 2 proced ures:
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room • On systems with XG D only, the iButto n a nd the Se nso r Cable
Subsequent Characters: are to b e i nstalled an d conn ected to J43 on PHPS 2 modu le.
• 0xxxx AC Power & Ground • On systems with XG 2 o nly, con nect the i Button to the pre viou sly
• 1xxxx Coax/RF installed sensor cabl e conn ected to J3 on th e P EM modu le.
The GOC hub/switch is only in clud ed on older GOCs. For newer
• 3xxxx Signal 3
• 4xxxx Other connection to service la pto p, site network, AW o pti on, or customer
supplie d switch (if multiple connections a re r equire d).
32 Ch MR450w GEM 1.5T Installation Interconnect Map with eSRPS & ICE/Artist T– Equipment & Control Rooms

E3030
RF Door SPW
HUB RJ45 E3014
Switch
MODEM E3045 RS232
J18/J115 M3030
Por t Ethernet AW (option)
(Option) Por t
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
KEYBOARD USB-RS422 E3023 J117 M3023
Converter
E3019 FJ7 E3018
E3019 CRY
[Orange/Green] F1
MOUSE
Mntr 2 J2 J4 E3025 JR JC 623
F2
624
J1 IRDC J5 Sensor Cable iButton F3
HOST E3046 Mntr 1 E0009 Power F4
DISPLAY J3

Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X
Spare J7 J8 Spare
From PGR)
M3309
J122 M1305
Facility J123 J121

Utilities
CRY Pwr J128 M1002
YEL HOSE
YELLOW
Power Box
Supply
Facility Air
Filter
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
J12 M4005 GND
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3 F power
M1312
[Yellow]
J8
Sensor
iButton
P2026 IRDC
Cable
Customer TR/DD
Filter
Outlet J7/J8
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND
Stud
PGR RED RED J92/J72 M1310
J17 GRN J12
J102
[Red] J6
GRN
E0003 E3013 J10
E3037 USB J3 E3028 J13 J43 J39 M3303
Hub J20 E3014
J35 M3313
E3011 J2 J41 M3312
(X) J40 M3302

CB1
G/PE
E4008 GND
J54
M3315
(Y)
J36
(Z)
PHPS2 M3311
MDP E4007 GND

Exciter
E4005 G ND
E4002 GND J19 J34 M3316
J9 Cabinet J32 M1303
GND J10 Interface J30 M1304
Stud J18 E1002 Head Tx J29
TB1-15-16 J19 E1001 Body Tx(CH1)
J21 E2023 2 F/O 32 CH J18
J22 E2020 6 F/O J17 Splitter
CB3 J1
J300 E1307 J16 J3
J2 M1302
CB2 E0001 Customer Supplied CB1 ICE

J29 Patient Alert J20
To OW1-PDM-J3
J38/J39 Control Box M2025 4 F/O
J14
REV 14.0
J31/J32 J15 P2003 6 F/O
F/O Waveguide
J1 E2002 2 F/O J19
Sensor
iButton Cable J3 J4 E3008 (CAN) J9
J5 E3006 (HART) J14
PEM eSRPS
J8 E3009 (UNBLANK) J3
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11 J111 M3378
J11 E1005 Body Tx J15 J112 M3375
J5
101
J12 E1003 Body TR

J16 E0004 Power J1

DIRECTION 5670002
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room The GOC hub/switch is only in clud ed on older GOCs. For
Check Valve 1
newer GO Cs, the Ethernet port on the Host PC is a va ilable fo r
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room dire ct conn ection to service laptop, site n etwork, A W option, or
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room customer supplie d switch (if multiple connections a re
Subsequent Characters: requ ired).
• 1xxxx Coax/RF
• 3xxxx Signal
• 4xxxx Other

SIGNA Artist Installation Interconnect Map – Equipment & Control Rooms -T5820

E3030
[Brown]
RF Door
E3014 SPW
Switch
Port A Service Laptop
[Yellow/Green]
Site Network
MODEM E3045 RS232 AW (option) J18/J115 M3030
(Option)
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
E3019 FJ7 E3018
Converter
E3019 CRY
[Orange/Green] F1
MOUSE
Mntr 2 J2 J4 E3025 JR JC 623
F2
624
DISPLAY J3

Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X M3317

Stud OW1-PDM Gradient
IRDC Power J11 J12 Spare E3419 Z Z M3419
Spare J7 J8 Spare
E0015 Host Display J4 J6 Spare
From PGR)
Facility HEC [Green]

Utilities
CRY Pwr J128 M1305
GREY GRY HOSE J106 M1001
IN Pwr
YEL HOSE
YELLOW
Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Water Facility Return Return AIR HOSE J105 Waveguide
Filter
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
CAT-5 J12 M4005 GND
FJ4 E4010 GND Ground Stud
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3  power
M1312
[Yellow]
J8
P2026 IRDC
Customer TR/DD
Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J92/J72 M1310
RED RED
Stud
J17 GRN PHPS2
GRN J12 J39 M3303
E0003 J102 J6 E3013 J10 J35 M3313
USB J3 E3028
E3037 J301 Hub J13 J41 M3312
J20 E3014 J40 M3302
E3011 J2 J54 M3315
G/PE
CB1
E4008 GND (X) J36 M3311

PGR
(Y) J37/J38
A
[Red] (Z)
B J1/J2
MDP E4007 GND
C J5/J6
E4005 GND CFB
E4002 GND
D J3/J4
J9 J7/J8
Cabinet
GND J10 Interface
Stud J18 E1002 Head Tx Later Systems
TB1-15-16 J19 E1001 Body Tx(CH1)
2
1
ICE 1 Exciter
J29 J22 P2020 6 F/O J17 J19 J32 M1303
CB3
J38/J39 J300 E1307 J23 J50 J30
J29 M1302
Patient Alert J20
To OW1-PDM-J3 Control Box M2025 4 F/O
1
J1/J2/J5 J14 P2003 3 F/O
REV 13.0
J6/J13/J14 J1 P2004 3 F/O

J17/J18/J30 P2006 3 F/O
J21
F/O Waveguide
J4 E3008 (CAN) J9
J5 E3006 (HART) J14
eSRPS J111 M3378
Sensor
iButton Cable J3 J8 E3009 (UNBLANK) J3 J112 M3375
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11
PEM Driver J17
Symbol Legend Module
107

Ball Valve J13 E1004 Head TR J6 MEMS J2 J57 M3392
Check Valve J16 E0004 Power J1 J3 J56 M3316

J30 E3391 J55 M3391

1 Refer to Fiber Optics section for detailed instructions
First Character (one-digit alpha): for routing and connecting fiber optics in cabinets. To CFB Early Systems
DIRECTION 5670002
J7/J8 (With Splitter)

 Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room
 Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room 2 A small number of early systems include a splitter 2
 Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room and different exciter connections as shown. Most Exciter
Subsequent Characters: systems use the later configuration.
 0xxxx AC Power & Ground J32 M1303
 1xxxx Coax/RF 3 The GOC hub/switch is only included on older J30

GOCs. For newer GOCs, the Ethernet port on the J19 J29
 2xxxx Fiber Optics
 3xxxx Signal Host PC is available for direct connection to service
Splitter
 4xxxx Other laptop, site network, AW option, or customer To J17 J1
supplied switch (if multiple connections are required). To J23 J3 J2 M1302
32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Installation Interconnect Map with eSRPS – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Enclosure
Resp.
ECG
Switch
PPG
(MRU)
Bulb
Enclosure MS1 A3 A1
LED
606
Chimney M3022 P403 (Terminal Box) (Magnet)
MS1 A5 A2
[Yellow/Green] (Pressure (Reed Switch) MAG-PAC I/F
E3030 J115 M3030 Transducer)
M3350
E3022 J116 PreAmp
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 Air Tube
F1 M3360 J2 MAG-PAC
J4
F3
F4 M2025-C J1
624 Power Coldhead
MS1 A2 Sleve
621 J110 Waveguide 621 Supply
(Coldhead) MAG-BORE
XRM
Patient Alert Tube M3344 Grad Temp
E3419 Z Z M3419 Z Z
Gradient
Buss Bar
AIR HOSE J104 Waveguide 4" AIR HOSE 1.5" AIR Gradient Coil Air
E1001 Body Tx (CH1) J106 M1001 J1 J4 M1322 J24
M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
J123 J121 IN MAG-AMP OUT M1335
(N.C) J120 M1306 RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
E1002 J128 M1002 M1310 J9
MAG-
DDSPLIT Bore Light (Front)
J22 M3344 Bore Light (Rear)
J6 J10 M3350 Bore Temp Sensor
J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
E3031 J118 M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J24 Airflow Sensor
J3 M3369 J21
J4 J32 M3345 Front Microphone
M3336 J1
RF Common Ground Stud J34 M3348 M3347 Speaker
3" AIR Patient Air
MAG-SRI J9
PEN MAG
[Yellow] M2025-A J13/J14 J4 M3337
(Mag I/O) M2025-B J11/J12 J4
TR/DD Filter [Blue] J20 M3341 (Landmark) J1
J94/J74 J3 M3370 (Dock Cntrl) J2
J92/J72 J31 M3346 J3
J17 J2 M3351
MAG-
J41 M3312 DCK-L
J39 M3303
J5 M3364 (DOCK Power)
Paren thesis Paren thesis
J40 M3302 Light (R) Light (L)
J35 M3313
M3382 M3383
J62 J61 J60 Dock
J111 M3378 J50 M3379 [Blue/
MAG-　　LDP Green]
M3366 Trackball J11
J42 M3314 IRDC J2 IRD MAG-　　RDP GEM-DOC
Trackball J11 Connector
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
P2 P3 P4
M3354
J11
MAG-TDM
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9 J2 M3368
J10 J3
P2026 F/O M3367 J1 J4
J32 M1303
J30 M1304
J34 M3316
J28
P2026 F/O (IRDC)
REV 14.0
J7
P2004 6 F/O 32 CH J21 J4/J5 RX2 J2 M332 3
J1 M332 2
P2003 6 F/O J20

M2025 4 F/O FOI M2301
J7
J9 RX1
J2 M3321
F/O Waveguide (F/O IF) J4/J5 J1 M332 0
J8
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
103
4" AIR HOSE

J101
F5, F7, F9, F11 PED-HUB
Antenna
M2025-D CAN
J102
PED
J103
F6, F8, F10
M2300 Strobe
RFCB Slot 11 J104

J105
J7 J106
J6 J107
J1 J108
J112 J4
DIRECTION 5670002
M3375
J3
PED- J1
J2
MTR J2
J8 M3358
J13 PED- J3
J1
J14/15 TIF J6 M3355
J16 J4
Symbol Legend
J17 J5
Ball Valve Check Valve J10 RFS B2 Body
Slot 1 P1
J9 P2
Interconnects Numbering Legend P3
P4
A
PDB Slot 12
First Character (one-digit alpha): M3376 J3
Body
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room M3377 J2 RFS B2
J1 Slot 2 P1
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room P2
P3
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in P4
A
Magnet and Equipment Room
M1305 J1
• 0xxxx AC Power & Ground M1306 J2
• 1xxxx Coax/RF PED I/O
• 2xxxx Fiber Optics Rear Microphone
Rear Pedestal Air J1, J2, J3, J5 Load A
• 3xxxx Signal
• 4xxxx Other Rear Pedestal LPCA P1 Load B
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option [Blue/Red]
32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Installation Interconnect Map with SRPS – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Enclosure
Resp.
ECG
Switch
PPG
(MRU)
Bulb
Enclosure MS1 A3 A1
LED
606
MS1 A5 A2
M3350
E3022 J116 PreAmp
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 Air Tube
F1 M3360 J2 MAG-PAC
J4
F3
F4 M2025-C J1
624 Power Coldhead
MS1 A2 Sleve
(Coldhead) MAG-BORE
XRM
E3419 Z Z M3419 Z Z
Gradient
Buss Bar
M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
E1002 J128 M1002 J9
MAG-
J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
E3031 J118 M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J24 Airflow Sensor
J3 M3369 J21
M3336 J1
3" AIR Patient Air
MAG-SRI J9
PEN MAG
[Yellow] M2025-A J13/J14 J4 M3337
(Mag I/O) M2025-B J11/J12 J4
J92/J72 J31 M3346 J3
J17 J2 M3351
MAG-
J41 M3312 DCK-L
J39 M3303
J35 M3313
M3382 M3383
J62 J61 J60 Dock
J111 M3378 J50 M3379 [Blue/
M3366 Trackball J11
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
P2 P3 P4
M3354
J11
MAG-TDM
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J51 M3300 J9 J2 M3368
J52 M3301 J10 J3
P2026 F/O M3367 J1 J4
J32 M1303
J30 M1304
J34 M3316
J28
P2026 F/O (IRDC)
REV 14.0
J7
P2004 6 F/O 32 CH J21 J4/J5 RX2 J2 M332 3
J1 M332 2
P2003 6 F/O J20

M2025 4 F/O FOI M2301
J7
J9 RX1
J2 M3321
F/O Waveguide (F/O IF) J4/J5 J1 M332 0
J8
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
104
4" AIR HOSE

J101
Antenna
M2025-D CAN
J102
PED
J103
F6, F8, F10
M2300 Strobe
RFCB Slot 11 J104

J105
J7 J106
J45 M3310 J6 J107
J46 M3306 J1 J108
J47 J4
DIRECTION 5670002
M3308
J48 M3304 J3
PED- J1
J2
MTR J2
J50 2 J8 M3358
J13 PED- J3
J1
J14/15 TIF J6 M3355
J16 J4
Symbol Legend
J17 J5
P1
J9 Slot 1 P2
P4
A
PDB Slot 12
First Character (one-digit alpha): J4
Body
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room J1 RFS B2
J6 Slot 2 P1
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room J2
P2
P3
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in 1 J3 P4
A
M1305 J1
• 3xxxx Signal 1 Shunt is installed for 32 Channel systems.
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option 2 Terminator applied at J50 of Penetration panel [Blue/Red]
32 Channel MR450w GEM 1.5T Installation Interconnect Map with eSRPS & ICE/Artist T – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Enclosure
Resp.
ECG
Switch
PPG
(MRU)
Bulb
Enclosure MS1 A3 A1
LED
606
MS1 A5 A2
M3350
E3022 J116 PreAmp
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 Air Tube
F1 M3360 J2 MAG-PAC
J4
F3
F4 M2025-C J1
624 Power Coldhead
MS1 A2 Sleve
(Coldhead) MAG-BORE
XRM
E3419 Z Z M3419 Z Z
Gradient
Buss Bar
M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
M3309
J2
(N.O.) J122 M1305
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
E1002 J128 M1002 M1310 J9
MAG-
J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
E3031 J118 M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J24 Airflow Sensor
J3 M3369 J21
M3336 J1
3" AIR Patient Air
MAG-SRI J9
PEN MAG
[Yellow] M2025-A J13/J14 J4 M3337
(Mag I/O) M2025-B J11/J12 J4
J92/J72 J31 M3346 J3
J17 J2 M3351
MAG-
J41 M3312 DCK-L
J39 M3303
J35 M3313
M3382 M3383
J62 J61 J60 Dock
J111 M3378 J50 M3379 [Blue/
M3366 Trackball J11
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
P2 P3 P4
M3354
J11
MAG-TDM
J29 M1302 J11 J12 M1315
J9 J2 M3368
J10 J3
P2026 F/O M3367 J1 J4
J32 M1303
J30 M1304
J34 M3316
J28
P2026 F/O (IRDC)
REV 14.0
J7
P2003 6 F/O J20 J5 RX2 J2 M332 3
J4 (not used) J1 M332 2
M2025 4 F/O FOI M2301

J7
J9 RX1
J2 M3321
F/O Waveguide (F/O IF) J5 J1

(not used) J4
M332 0
J8
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
105
4" AIR HOSE

J101
Antenna
M2025-D CAN
J102
PED
J103
F6, F8, F10
M2300 Strobe
RFCB Slot 11 J104

J105
J7 J106
J6 J107
J1 J108
J112 J4
DIRECTION 5670002
M3375
J3
PED- J1
J2
MTR J2
J8 M3358
J13 PED- J3
J1
J14/15 TIF J6 M3355
J16 J4
Symbol Legend
J17 J5
Slot 1 P1
J9 P2
P4
A
PDB Slot 12
First Character (one-digit alpha): M3376 J3
Body
• Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room M3377 J2 RFS B2
J1 Slot 2 P1
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room P2
P3
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in P4
A
M1305 J1
• 3xxxx Signal
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option [Blue/Red]
SIGNA Artist (96 Ch) and Artist XT (128 Ch) Installation Interconnect Map – Magnet Room
P. Gating
Sqeeze
Enclosure
Resp.
ECG
Switch
PPG
(MRU)
Bulb
Enclosure MS1 A3 A1
LED
606
MS1 A5 A2
M3350
E3022 J116 PreAmp
E3023 J117 M3023 FJ2 830 J2 J1 Air Tube
F1 M3360 J2 MAG-PAC
J4
F3
F4 M2025-C J1
624 Power Coldhead
MS1 A2 Sleve
(Coldhead) MAG-BORE
XRM
E3419 Z Z M3419 Z Z
Gradient
Buss Bar
M1312 J6 MAG-HYB J3 M1323 J23
J2
IN MAG-AMP OUT M1335
E1002 J128 M1305
RF Coil
J20 M1313 J6 (Rear)
M1310 J9
MAG-
J23 M3342 Bore-PAL
E3031 J118 M3031 J1 M3339 J33
J24 Airflow Sensor
J3 M3369 J21
M3336 J1
3" AIR Patient Air
MAG-SRI J9
PEN MAG
[Yellow] M2025-A J13/J14 J4 M3337
(Mag I/O) M2025-B J11/J12 J4
J92/J72 J31 M3346 J3
J2 M3351
MAG-
J41 M3312 DCK-L
J39 M3303
J35 M3313
M3382 M3383
J62 J61 J60 Dock
J111 M3378 J50 M3379 [Blue/
M3366 Trackball J11
J54 M3315
J36 M3311
P2 P3 P4
F8, F10 J11
F7, F9, F11
4" AIR HOSE

Blower
J57 RX DIST
J29 M1302 J19 J13
J55 M3391 J14 J58
J32 M1303 J12
J30 J10
J56 M3316 J18
J112 M3375 J1
J16
P2026 F/O J22

J2
J28 J3
J4 J11 M1315
REV 13.0
M3367
M3368
M3369
M3470
P2026 F/O (IRDC) J7 DPP1 J1

J2
P2003 3 F/O J21 J6 J3
P2004 3 F/O J22 J9
P2006 3 F/O J23
J7 DPP2 J1
M2025 4 F/O FOI J2
F/O Waveguide (F/O IF) J6 J3
106
J9
J7 DPP3 J1
J2
J6 J3
J9
J7 DPP4 J1
DIRECTION 5670002
J2
J6 J3
J9
J57 M3392
Spare
Symbol Legend
Check Valve TNS
Ball Valve Antenna

PED- J1
First Character (one-digit alpha): MTR J2
M3358
• Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room PED- J3
J1
TIF J6 M3355
• Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in
J4
Magnet and Equipment Room J5
M1305 J1
• 3xxxx Signal J3
• 4xxxx Other P1 Load B
--Dotted lines for module outlines or cables indicate an option Rear Pedestal
LPCA J5
[Blue/Red]
SIGNA Artist Installation Interconnect Map – Equipment & Control Rooms -T5820

E3030
[Brown]
RF Door
E3014 SPW
Switch
Port A Service Laptop
[Yellow/Green]
Site Network
MODEM E3045 RS232 AW (option) J18/J115 M3030
(Option)
HOST
PC E3022 J116 M3022
E3019 FJ7 E3018
Converter
E3019 CRY
[Orange/Green] F1
MOUSE
Mntr 2 J2 J4 E3025 JR JC 623
F2
624
DISPLAY J3

Water Supply
Line In J12 J18
E3016 FJ6 E3015
SCIM E3047 J6 J7 E3031 J118 M3031
GND E3317 X X M3317

Stud OW1-PDM Gradient
IRDC Power J11 J12 Spare E3419 Z Z M3419
Spare J7 J8 Spare
E0015 Host Display J4 J6 Spare
From PGR)
Facility HEC [Green]

Utilities
CRY Pwr J128 M1305
GREY GRY HOSE J106 M1001
IN Pwr
YEL HOSE
YELLOW
Power Box
Facility
Supply
Facility Air
Water Facility Return Return AIR HOSE J105 Waveguide
Filter
Return
Signal Box GND
GND Stud
Stud
CAT-5 J12 M4005 GND
FJ4 E4010 GND Ground Stud
FJ3 RED PEN
GND power
Panel
3  power
M1312
[Yellow]
J8
P2026 IRDC
Customer TR/DD
Filter
Outlet
Customer Supplied
Customer Supplied
J94/J74 M1312
GND J92/J72 M1310
RED RED
Stud
J17 GRN PHPS2
GRN J12 J39 M3303
E0003 J102 J6 E3013 J10 J35 M3313
USB J3 E3028
E3037 J301 Hub J13 J41 M3312
J20 E3014 J40 M3302
E3011 J2 J54 M3315
G/PE
CB1
E4008 GND (X) J36 M3311

PGR
(Y) J37/J38
A
[Red] (Z)
B J1/J2
MDP E4007 GND
C J5/J6
E4005 GND CFB
E4002 GND
D J3/J4
J9 J7/J8
Cabinet
GND J10 Interface
Stud J18 E1002 Head Tx Later Systems
TB1-15-16 J19 E1001 Body Tx(CH1)
2
1
ICE 1 Exciter
J29 J22 P2020 6 F/O J17 J19 J32 M1303
CB3
J38/J39 J300 E1307 J23 J50 J30 M1304
J29 M1302
Patient Alert J20
To OW1-PDM-J3 Control Box M2025 4 F/O
1
J1/J2/J5 J14 P2003 3 F/O
REV 14.0
J6/J13/J14 J1 P2004 3 F/O

J17/J18/J30 P2006 3 F/O
J21
F/O Waveguide
J4 E3008 (CAN) J9
J5 E3006 (HART) J14
eSRPS J111 M3378
Sensor
iButton Cable J3 J8 E3009 (UNBLANK) J3 J112 M3375
J103 E3002 (E-Stop) J11
PEM Driver J17
Symbol Legend Module
107

Ball Valve J13 E1004 Head TR J6 MEMS J2 J57 M3392
Check Valve J16 E0004 Power J1 J3 J56 M3316

J30 E3391 J55 M3391

1 Refer to Fiber Optics section for detailed instructions
First Character (one-digit alpha): for routing and connecting fiber optics in cabinets. To CFB Early Systems
DIRECTION 5670002
J7/J8 (With Splitter)

 Exxxx Runs in Equipment Room or Control Room
 Mxxxx Runs entirely in the Magnet Room 2 A small number of early systems include a splitter 2
 Pxxxx Runs through PEN or SPW and routed in Magnet and Equipment Room and different exciter connections as shown. Most Exciter
Subsequent Characters: systems use the later configuration.
 0xxxx AC Power & Ground J32 M1303
 1xxxx Coax/RF 3 The GOC hub/switch is only included on older J30 M1304
GOCs. For newer GOCs, the Ethernet port on the J19 J29
 2xxxx Fiber Optics
 3xxxx Signal Host PC is available for direct connection to service
Splitter
 4xxxx Other laptop, site network, AW option, or customer To J17 J1
supplied switch (if multiple connections are required). To J23 J3 J2 M1302
This page intentionally left blank
REV 14.0
108
DIRECTION 5670002
6.3 Sorting and routing cables

6.3.1 Sorting cables
CAUTION
POSSIBLE LACERATIONS
Failure to trim tie-wraps can result in numerous laceration hazards when
servicing the equipment.
Tie-wraps must be cut flush with no protruding sharp edges or points.
Move lean cable carts into assigned room. System power, ground, and data cables are color coded at
each end by destination per colors shown on cable map.
1. Sort cables by destination. Normally, it is best to sort cables originating from the farthest cabinet or
component from the PDU first. This will make it easier to pull cables through the overhead cable
trays.
NOTE
Carefully review architectural drawings to make sure that all ducts are properly
installed and that all signal and power cables are accounted for before starting to
route cable runs.
2. Unroll coiled cables to insure that they will route freely without twists or kinks. Route cables in
accordance with the applicable Installation Interconnect Diagram.
3. Most of the cables are easily identifiable from the lean carts and from the different system
hardware sub-assemblies as explained in Product Delivery Instructions.
6.3.2 Routing cables

The following cables are grouped together in the overhead cable trays, as indicated in Cable Locations in
Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays and Cable Locations in Magnet Room Overhead Cable Trays.
Equipment room cable runs
• PGR to PEN:
• E3002, E3006, E3008, E3009
• E1005, E0004, E4002, E4005 (GND wall stud)
• E1003, E1004
• E1307 (systems with ICE), E3391 (Artist and Artist XT)
• PGR to SPW: E1001, E1002

• PGR to OW: E3037 (Artist/T/XT), E0003, E3011, E3015, E4008
• PGR to HEC: E3013, E3028, E4007
• OW to PEN: E3017, E3018
• MagMon to SPW & PEN: E3020, E3022, E3023
Magnet room cable runs

• PEN & SPW to MAG I/O M3031, M3302, M3303, M3312, M3313, M3314 (IRD option)
• PEN to REAR PED (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T): M1303 and M1304
• PEN to REAR PED: M3301, M3304, M3306, M3308, M3310 (SRPS only) or M3375 (eSRPS only)
• PEN to REAR PED: M3311, M3315, M3316
• SPW to REAR PED: M1306 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T), M1305
• SPW to REAR PED (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T): M3309
• SPW & PEN to MAG HYB: M1001, M1312
• REAR PED to MAG-TDM (MR450w and MR450w GEM with eSRPS, Artist T): M3376, M3377
• PEN to MAG-TDM: (M3300, M3301 SRPS only), M1302 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)
• PEN to MAG components: M1310, M3378
Any cables not listed above should be routed through the overhead cable trays separately.
6.4 Storage of excess cable length

6.4.1 Coiling excess cable length
The type of coiling used to store excess length of cables depends on the type of cable. Data cables are
coiled differently than fiber optic cables. Only the gradient cable will be cut to length.
• Data cables - Excess length of cables must be coiled in a “Figure Eight” pattern. DO NOT COIL IN
CIRCLES!
• Fiber optic cables - Excess length of cables must be coiled in a circle pattern. DO NOT COIL IN A
“FIGURE EIGHT” PATTERN!
Figure 38 Proper coiling of excess cables
1. Excess data cable to be stored in overhead cable trays or penetration panel closet must be routed
in a figure eight pattern as shown.
NOTICE
The minimum bend radius of any cable must not be violated no matter
how the excess cable is coiled.
2. For smaller figure eight patterns, dress and tie-wrap middle of looped cables.
3. For longer figure eight patterns, dress and tie-wrap ends of looped cables
4. Excess data cable to be stored in overhead cable trays, penetration panel closet, or in magnet
enclosure area must be routed in a circular pattern as shown.
5. Refer to Cables Installed on Site table in Cable Specification for information on minimum bend
radius for each cable.
6. Repeat as necessary for cables in magnet or equipment room.
6.4.2 Equipment room storage

1. Route cables in provided overhead cable trays, conduit, or ducts. Leave sufficient slack for later
connection when cabinets are in final position according to site architectural plans.
2. Excess cable length will be stored in overhead cable trays.
6.4.3 Magnet room storage

1. Route cables inside magnet room through overhead cable trays, conduit, or ducts to rear of magnet
area with sufficient length remaining to complete routing and connecting within magnet enclosure.
2. Excess cable length can be stored in penetration panel closet. Excess fiber optic cable wires can
also be stored under magnet.
6.5 Rear magnet enclosure cable cover test-fit

Before routing any cables in the magnet room, refer to the following illustration(s). Routed cables can
not touch the rear cable cover when cover is installed at the back of the magnet.
6.5.1 Non-GEM style enclosure

Figure 39 Cable routing area at rear non-GEM style cable cover
1. The two dimensions provided, 290 mm and 630 mm, are measured from the center of the magnet.
2. The top of the Rear Magnet Cover measures approximately 785 mm from the top of the rear
endbell.
3. Observe the relationship between the end of the overhead cable tray and the area where the
cables are to be routed through. IMPORTANT! Make sure the cables will not touch the top of the
covers when routing of cables is complete.
4. View of rear magnet covers and cable cover after installation.
6.5.2 GEM style enclosure

Figure 40 Cable routing area at rear GEM style cable cover
1. The two dimensions provided, 290 mm and 500 mm, are measured from the center of the magnet.
2. The top of the rear magnet cover measures approximately 785 mm from the top of the rear endbell.
3. Observe the relationship between the end of the overhead cable tray and the area where the
cables are to be routed through. IMPORTANT! Make sure the cables will not touch the top of the
covers when routing of cables is complete.
4. View of rear magnet covers and cable cover after installation.
6.6 Cable locations in equipment room overhead

cable trays
Front, rear, left, and right, as used in this section, are defined as follows: the patient entrance end of the
magnet is the front; the opposite end is the rear; left and right are in respect to a person’s left and right
while facing the patient entrance end of the magnet.
DANGER
FERROUS MATERIAL HAZARD
If the magnet is energized, the crimp tool, blower box, and other tools and
parts required for this installation that contain ferrous material will be
strongly attracted to the magnet and may become dangerous projectiles.
Keep all ferrous tools at least 10 ft away from the magnet.
DANGER
Lethal voltages are present in the PGR PDU/gradient cabinet.
All cables routed between cabinets and the penetration panels must use the overhead cable routing
mechanisms or cable trays. For simplicity, in this manual, overhead cable routing mechanisms are
referred to as overhead cable trays.
CAUTION
MUSCLE STRAIN
Awkward body positioning and / or working from a ladder may cause strain
while installing cables.
Take breaks as necessary to prevent personal harm.
NOTICE
When working in the ceiling area, confirm with the site that no unforeseen
hazards exist.
NOTE
The cables must be routed in their designated areas. There are two options for these
areas:
• The designated areas are partitioned within one large cable tray (As shown below in
the left tray)
• The designated areas are made up of four individual cable trays or other routing
mechanisms
The following illustration indicates where the cables, per their Run numbers, are to be routed in a
partitioned cable tray. Refer to site architectural drawings and local codes for additional specific
guidelines.
Figure 41 Equipment room overhead cable assignments
The following illustration shows the two different types of overhead cable tray layouts that can be
installed at sites. The views below show the ends of the trays as viewed at the rear of the magnet.
• If the stacked layout is installed at site, the power, data, and gradient cables MUST ALWAYS be
routed in the top cable tray. The water, gas, and air hoses must always be routed in the lower tray.
• In the side-by-side layout, the power, data, and gradient cables should be routed in the left tray.
Figure 42 Cable tray layout configurations
Either layouts can be installed in the equipment room.
6.7 Cable locations in magnet room overhead cable

trays
Front, rear, left, and right, as used in this section, are defined as follows: the patient entrance end of the
magnet is the front; the opposite end is the rear; left and right are in respect to a person’s left and right
while facing the patient entrance end of the magnet.
DANGER
If the magnet is energized, the crimp tool, blower box, and other tools and
parts required for this installation that contain ferrous material will be
strongly attracted to the magnet and may become dangerous projectiles.
Keep all ferrous tools at least 10 ft away from the magnet.
DANGER
Lethal voltages are present in the PGR PDU/gradient cabinet.
The magnet room may have a ceiling constructed of tiled panels. These panels will have to be carefully
removed for access to overhead cable trays.
• Carefully remove and store ceiling tiles for re-installation after cables are installed.
• All excess cable will be coiled and stored in the Pen panel closet.
• All cables routed between magnet and the penetration panels must use the overhead cable trays.
NOTICE
When working in the ceiling area, confirm with the site that no unforeseen
hazards exist.
CAUTION
MUSCLE STRAIN
NOTE
The cables in the cable trays must be routed in their designated areas. There are two
options for these areas:
• The designated areas are partitioned within one large cable tray (As shown below in
the left tray)
• The designated areas are made up of four individual cable trays or other routing
mechanisms
The following illustration (typical view) indicates where the cables, per their Run numbers, are to be
routed in the partitioned cable trays, as seen from the magnet end of trays as viewed from the front of
the magnet. Refer to site architectural drawings and local codes for additional specific guidelines.
Figure 43 Magnet room overhead cable assignments
The following illustration shows the two different types of overhead cable tray layouts that can be
installed at sites. The views below show the ends of the trays as viewed at the rear of the magnet.
• If the stacked layout is installed at site, the power, data, and gradient cables MUST ALWAYS be
routed in the top cable tray. The water, gas, and air hoses must always be routed in the lower tray.
• In the side-by-side layout, the power, data, and gradient cables should be routed in the left tray.
Figure 44 Overhead cable tray configurations
Either layout can be installed in the magnet room.
6.8 Cryogen line positioning on magnet

Cryogen lines should have been routed in the correct overhead tray and connected to the shield cooler
during magnet installation.
Figure 45 Routing of cryogen lines
1. Make sure that cryogen lines have been routed around vent stack as shown in the illustration.
2. Make sure that there is enough slack in the lines to avoid interference with final installation of all
magnet enclosure covers.
NOTE
When routing remainder of cable, make sure to not route any cables in indicated area
(number 3 above). This area on the magnet needs to be clear so that service ladder cover
can be placed over modules attached to side of magnet.
NOTE
While routing the orange cryogen line, stay clear of the service turret so that it does not
interfere with insertion of the current probes when ramping the magnet. Also make sure
that the cryogen line remains out of the way from the fill port.
6.9 Gradient cable installation

NOTICE
A recent design change has reduced the gauge size of gradient cables for
Optima MR450w & MR450w GEM and MR750w & MR750w GEM systems.
Systems that ship with the new gradient cables will also include a kit of
mounting hardware that is needed to properly install these new gradient
cables. The mounting hardware that was needed for the old cables remains
a part of the system structure, and must be de-installed and replaced with
the new hardware. This swapping of hardware will occur at the PGR
cabinet, on both sides of the Secondary Pen Wall (SPW), and at the rear of
the magnet.
6.9.1 SPW L-bracket replacement

The following steps are to be used for replacing the L-Brackets on both sides of the SPW.
NOTE
The Z-cable will require a larger U-bolt than the X-cable and Y-cable and should be located
nearest to the SPW panel.
Figure 46 SPW L-bracket upgrade
1. Remove nuts from the U-bolts.

2. Remove U-bolts from the L-bracket and discard the U-bolts.
3. Remove nuts that secure the L-bracket to the SPW wall. Discard the old L-bracket.
4. Position new L-bracket and fasten with the nuts provided.

5. Install the new U-bolts and tighten with the nuts provided.
6. Repeat above steps for replacing the L-Bracket and U-bolts on other side of SPW.
6.9.2 Equipment room gradient cables

The equipment room gradient cables, Runs E3317, E3318, and E3419 are delivered to site pre-
terminated at one end for connection to the PGR cabinet. The other ends of the gradient cables are
routed to the SPW (Secondary Pen Wall), cut to length, and terminated.
NOTICE
When cutting cables, be sure to allow for a small amount of slack in case
cables need to be re-crimped.
NOTICE
Gradient Cables are heavy, use two or more people when lifting cables.
CAUTION
MUSCLE STRAIN
6.9.2.1 Route gradient cables in overhead cable tray

It is recommended that the three gradient cables be routed through the overhead cable trough before
any of the other cables are routed.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO OVERHEAD CABLE ROUTING MECHANISMS/TRAYS
Horizontal movement of cable trays while routing cables can damage cable
tray rods attached to ceiling.
Do not pull on cables at end of cable trays. Route cables in trays by lifting
and moving cables to connection points in overhead cable trays.
Figure 47 Routing of gradient cables in equipment room
1. It is recommended that the three gradient cables be routed through the overhead cable trough
before any of the other cables are routed.
2. Make sure all non-magnetic tools, ropes, and/or ladders that may be required for routing of cables
are assembled and ready for use.
3. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray, route the pre-terminated end of each cable through the
designated overhead cable tray towards the PGR Cabinet.
• Position in the cable tray as shown in section titled Cable Locations in Equipment Room
Overhead Cable Trays.
• Gradient cables MUST lay in a single layer next to each other.
4. Route the pre-terminated ends of each gradient cable to the top/front of the PGR cabinet for
connection to terminals.
6.9.2.2 Replace gradient cable bracket and clamps at PGR (if required)
This procedure may not be required if the cable bracket and clamps already installed at the top of the
cabinet are the same as described in the following steps. Check to see that the cable clamp for the Z-
cable is larger than the other two clamps. If this is the case, then the cable bracket and clamps do not
need to be replaced.
1. Remove safety shield at top of PGR cabinet to allow easier access to gradient cable clamps.
2. If attached, remove the ground wire from the ground stud on the cable support bracket.
Figure 48 PGR cable bracket and clamps
3. Remove screws that fasten the cable clamps to the cable support bracket.
4. Remove screws that secure the cable support bracket to the PGR cabinet. Discard all three clamps
and the cable support bracket.
5. Install the new equipment room cable support bracket included in the hardware kit that came with
the gradient cables per the table below.
Figure 49 Cable bracket and clamp identification
NOTE
The support bracket has one cable slot with a larger diameter than the other two. Be
sure to install the support bracket so this larger slot is on the right side when viewed
from the front of the PGR cabinet. This larger slot is sized to fit the Z-cable.
6. Refer to the above illustration to determine proper clamps to attach to the support bracket.
7. Loosely attach the appropriate clamps and with the screws provided. Cables will be installed in the
next procedure.
6.9.2.3 Proper crimping of gradient cables

The Thomas & Betts TBM5 or TBM5-S Crimper Tool and the lugs listed in Table 7 on page 125 are
approved for field-terminated gradient cable installation for this system.
NOTE
An optional hydraulic tool (T&B TBM6PCR-LI) has been bay tested to be safe at 200 gauss
and is available directly from the manufacturer (www.tnb.com). If choosing this option,
also purchase the necessary crimping dies for the tool as specified in Table 7 on page 125.
Table 7 Approved gradient cable lugs
Picture GE part MFG MFG part Color Die num- Gauge Number Stud size
number number band ber of com-
press-
ions per
side
Thomas &
5392270 Betts 54150 Green 37 1AWG 1 .500”
Thomas &
5392407 Betts 54160 Black 45 2/0 2 .500”
Thomas &
5368384 Betts 54105 Blue 24 6AWG 1 .250”
NOTE
Table 7 on page 125 shows the dimensions and number of crimps required for the TBM5-S
crimping tool.
Figure 50 on page 125 shows a picture of the 1 AWG lug used on the X and Y gradient cables, identifying
the features of the lug.
Figure 50 Lug feature identification
Item Description
1 Terminal mating area
2 End bellmouth
3 Conductor crimp area
4 Entry bellmouth
5 Brush inspection window
Match the color on the connector to the color on the die. Refer to Table 8 on page 126.
NOTE
A crimping nest with more than one color band may be used to crimp Color-Keyed®
connectors matching any of the nest color bands.
Figure 51 Die
Item Description
1 Nest
2 Color code
Table 8 Die color codes
Die catalog number Die groove color Equivalent hex die code number
Red 21
13454
Blue 24
Die color codes continued

Die catalog number Die groove color Equivalent hex die code number
Grey 29
Brown 33
Green 37
Pink 42
13455
Black 45
Orange 50
Purple 54
13456
Yellow 62
Gold 45
Tan 50
13457
Olive 54
Ruby 60
13458 White-66 66
NOTE
All conductor strands must be contained within the conductor crimp area. Zero loose
strands are allowed.
Figure 52 Good and bad loose strand examples
Item Description
1 Good
2 Bad
1. Wire strands must be equal in length to allow for full installation into the crimp contact area.
Crimps shall be centered within the crimp area and a bellmouth should be evident at each end of
the conductor crimp area. No visible fractures or cracks should be present in the lug barrel or
terminal contact mating area.
Figure 53 Good and bad strand depth example
Item Description
1 Good
2 Bad
2. The only qualified crimpers approved for use with the Thomas & Betts color keyed lugs are the
Thomas & Betts model TBM5 or TBM5-S.
Figure 54 TBM5-S crimp tool
Item Description
1 Crimp tool
2 Tool creates diamond style crimp
3. Proper crimp compressions used on the 2/0 AWG, 1 AWG, and 6 AWG gradient cables.
a. For the 2/0 AWG gradient cable (Z axis), black bands with the printed word BLACK and the
number 45 appears on the lug. The crimp compression is diamond shaped and embossed with
number 45. Double-crimp the lug by first crimping between the lines on the lug closest to the
terminal mating area (item 1 on the following image). Then crimp between the lines on the lug
closest to the cable insulation (item 2 on image).
Figure 55 2/0 AWG crimp pattern
Item Description
1 First crimp (between lines on lug, closest to terminal mating area)
2 Second crimp (between lines on lug, closest to cable insulation)
b. For the 1 AWG gradient cable (X and Y axis), green bands with the printed word GREEN and the
number 37 appears on the lug. The single crimp compression is diamond shaped and
embossed with number 37.
Figure 56 1 AWG crimp pattern
c. For the 6 AWG gradient cable (ground lead), blue bands with the printed word BLUE and the
number 24 appears on the lug. The single crimp compression is diamond shaped and
embossed with number 24.
Figure 57 6 AWG crimp pattern
4. The allowable strand damage as defined by IPC/WHMA-A-620C section 3.2 for Class 2 is 6%. The
number of damaged (scraped, nicked, or severed) strands in a single cable shall not exceed this
limit. The maximum number of allowable cut strands are limited to 6%.
Number of damaged strands allowed
Gauge 1AWG 2/0
Strands 50 80
NOTE
Strands that are cut off and do not continue into the lug barrel shall be considered a
loose strand and noted as a defect.
Figure 58 Example of 1 AWG with greater than 6% cut strands
5. No charred or melted insulation should be evident. Insulation should be less than 2 wire bundle
diameters from the entry bellmouth. Insulation should not extend into the barrel of lug.
Figure 59 Example of 1 AWG maximum insulation clearance
Item Description
1 2 wire bundle diameter
2 Crimp
6.9.2.4 Connect gradient cable to PGR cabinet

The steps for this procedure install just one of the gradient cables. Repeat the steps below for
installation and connection of the remaining gradient cables and the ground wires.
NOTE
If the gradient cable clamp bracket was removed in the earlier cabinet positioning
procedures, reattach using the removed screws.
Figure 60 PGR cabinet gradient cables
1. If installed, remove cover at top of cabinet to access gradient cable clamps.

2. Position the braided area of the cable in the clamp at the top of the cabinet.
3. Close clamp around cable, but do not tighten completely. Adjustment may be necessary as the
terminated ends of wires are attached.
4. Position the two black wires on the right stud of the terminal block. Install flat washers then install
split lock washers. Fasten with nuts.
5. Position the two red wires on left stud of the terminal block. Install flat washers then install split
lock washers. Fasten with nuts.
6. Attach the ground wire on the ground stud. Install flat washers then install split lock washers.
Fasten with nut.
7. Reinstall the safety shield at top of PGR cabinet.
8. Reinstall the cover at top of PGR cabinet.
6.9.2.5 Remove gradient filter safety shields on gradient filter
Figure 61 Remove safety shields
1. Unfasten three screws and remove the front safety shield. Save for re-installation after cables are
attached.
2. NOTE: The side safety shield may or may not be removed. It is required to be in place after
completion of gradient cable installation. Keeping this shield attached to gradient filter during
gradient cable installation will make sure that the cables will have enough length to attach to the
studs at the bottom of the gradient filter.
3. If it is necessary to remove the safety shield, unfasten three screws and remove the side safety
shield. Save for re-installation after cables are attached.
4. This photograph offers a view of what the gradient cable installation will look like after connection
of the cables and prior to re-installation of the front safety cover.
6.9.2.6 Cut gradient cable to length at SPW

The following steps will provide instructions for exposing the cable braid, cutting to length and
terminating the red and black wires for connection to the studs on the bottom of the Gradient Filter.
NOTE
Allow for some slack in the cables before cutting to length. Slack will allow for re-
termination if required.
Figure 62 Trimming gradient cables
1. Position cables at U-bolt clamp at side of SPW (Secondary Pen Wall) and mark each cable.
2. From the mark on each cable, measure and cut each cable according to Table 9 on page 134.
Table 9 Gradient cable length
X Y Z
Cut to Length from 20 Inches (508 mm) 22 Inches (559 mm) 25 Inches (635 mm)
Mark
3. To expose the braid, remove the outer cable jacket to the mark created in Step 2.
a. Before cutting the outer jacket, place the large hook onto the stripper. While pushing up on the
small hook, push the large hook into the hook release until a click is heard. Remove the small
hook. Slide the large hook into the stripper until a click is heard.
Figure 63 Large hook installation
Item Description
1 Push up on small hook
2 Hook release
b. Position the wire stripper around the outer jacket of the gradient cable and adjust the blade
depth to the minimum thickness of the outer insulation (do not cut through the braid).
Figure 64 Blade depth adjustment
Item Description
1 Blade
2 Outer Insulation
c. Turn the blade to the (--) mark. Lift the spring-loaded hook and position the stripper onto the
desired mark made in Cut gradient cable to length at SPW on page 133. Rotate the stripper
clockwise around the outer jacket. Keep the stripper on the jacket at the desired mark, pull
back on the handle to remove the blade from the jacket material, and rotate the blade 90
degrees (turn the handle from ' -- ' mark to ' | ' mark). Then allow the tool to re-enter the
material and strip the jacket lengthwise to remove the outer jacket.
Figure 65 Rotate tool
Item Description
1 Rotate the tool around the jacket
2 rotate the blade 90 degrees
3 Cut the jacket lengthwise
d. Remove the foil shield exposing the braid shield.
Figure 66 Foil shield and braid shield
Item Description
1 Foil shield
2 Braid shield
4. Measure and mark 3.5 inches (90 mm) from the edge of the outer cable jacket.
a. Push the braid up to the 3.5 inch mark to form a safe area. Cut the shield using a diagonal head
semi-flush or shear wire cutter. Do not use a knife, this may cut into the 1 AWG wires.
Figure 67 Cutting the braid shield
b. Remove the white gradient cable packing to the end of the braided shield.
• (For the X or Y axis) Expose the 4 conductor 1 AWG and the single 6 AWG ground.
• (For the Z axis) Expose the 4 conductor 2/0 AWG and the single 6 AWG ground.
Figure 68 Cable packing
5. On the end of each cable jacket, apply the provided yellow and green tape as shown in Figure 62 on
page 133. Also apply the applicable cable label for each Run: RUN E3317 = FILT X, RUN E3318 = FILT
Y, RUN E3419 = FILT Z.
6. Apply electrical tape around the edge of the braid to prevent braid unraveling. Do not apply tape
over gradient lug. Gradient lug must be available for inspection.
Figure 69 Taping braid
7. Measure the excess cut cable. Inform the GE Field Engineer the length of the excess cut cable. The
data will be used for future gradient cable design.
8. Discard the remaining cable.
6.9.2.7 Connect gradient cable wires to gradient filter
Figure 70 Gradient cables connection information
1. Remove the plastic shield.

2. Position the X, Y, and Z gradient cables on bracket and tighten U-bolts around braided section of
each cable.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO GRADIENT CABLES
Over-tightening of U-bolts in mounting bracket can damage gradient
cables.
Do not over-tighten U-bolts.
3. Terminal attachment locations: Black wires = X-, Y-, Z-. Red wires = X+, Y+, Z+.
4. Note the back-to-back position of the terminals attached to studs. Before crimping terminals onto
wires, position and mark the cables as to alignment of terminals for ease of fastening crimped
terminals to studs.
NOTE
See Cut gradient cable to length at SPW on page 133 for the order of installation of
cables on studs. Adjustment to the lengths of any of the red or black wires may be
necessary to accommodate connections to the studs.
5. Use the lug to determine the strip length. Mark the cable strip location.
Figure 71 Determine length
6. Strip the wires using the Greenlee 1903 wire stripper supplied in the GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit
5790054.
a. Replace the large hook, used on the outer jacket, with the small hook.
b. Position the stripper over the end of the cable. Rotate the silver blade head in a clockwise or
counter clockwise direction to decrease or increase the top blade cutting depth. Determine
the blade depth to avoid gradient cable strand damage.
NOTE
Do not touch the wire strands with the blade.
Figure 72 Setting blade depth
c. Turn the blade to the ( -- ) mark. Lift the spring-loaded hook and position the stripper on the
cable mark. Rotate the tool clockwise around the cable until adequate penetration of the
insulation is achieved.
Figure 73 Tool position
d. While the stripper is still on the wire, turn the blade 90 degrees to the ( | ) mark. Cut
lengthwise to remove the insulation.
Figure 74 Insulation removal
7. Label each of the five wires in each gradient cable wire per table in Figure 70 on page 138. Red
wires are “+”, Black wires are “-”.
8. Make sure terminals are positioned correctly as shown in Figure 75 on page 142.
Figure 75 Final connection of magnet room gradient cables
9. Route and cut ground wires to length. Strip length determined by holding the lug on the end of the
cable. See Figure 71 on page 139. Crimp a furnished T & B 54105 terminal on each ground wire.
Connect wires as indicated.
NOTE
Do not over tighten GND studs.
10. Using the two-wrench method, hold the ground stud with one wrench and tighten the hex nut with
the other wrench until tight.
NOTICE
In the next step, make sure the terminals are positioned correctly
before crimping.
NOTE
All the wire strands from the gradient leads are required for a secure crimp.
NOTE
To ensure the lugs remain flat when they are placed back-to-back, position the crimp
tool so that the flat side of the crimp on the top lug is flush with the flat side of the
bottom lug.
11. Use only the TBM5 or the TBM5-S supplied in GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit 5790054 and the
furnished T&B lugs (54150 - X and Y gradient cable, 54160 - Z gradient cable and 54105 - GND
gradient cable). Position the lug in die grooves of the tool so the die is between the outer color-
coded marks. Crimp the terminals on the wires.
Figure 76 Lug placement on crimp tool
Item Description
1 Wire
2 Die
3 Lug
4 Crimp tool
12. Place lugs into position on the gradient filter.

13. Using the 2 wrench method, hold the hex nut with one wrench and tighten the Spiralock hex nut
with the other wrench until tight. Repeat for all lugs.
Figure 77 Tighten lugs
Item Description
1 Hex nut
2 Spiralock nut
14. Install the plastic safety shield.
6.9.2.8 Install safety cover(s)
Figure 78 Gradient filter safety covers
1. If removed, re-attach the Side Safety Shield using the three previously removed screws.
2. Re-attach the Front Safety Shield with the three previously removed screws.
6.9.3 Magnet room gradient cables

The magnet room gradient cables, Runs M3317, M3318, and M3419 are delivered to site pre-terminated
at one end for connection to the rear of the Magnet. The other ends of the gradient cables are routed to
the SPW (Secondary Pen Wall), cut to length, and terminated.
6.9.3.1 Route gradient cables in overhead cable tray
Figure 79 Magnet room gradient cables
2. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray in the Pen Panel Closet, route the pre-terminated end of
each cable through the designated overhead cable tray towards the rear of the Magnet.
• Make sure they are positioned in the cable tray as shown in section titled Cable Locations in
Magnet Room Overhead Cable Trays
• Gradient cables MUST lay in a single layer next to each other
3. Route the pre-terminated ends of each gradient cable to the rear of the magnet for connection to
terminals as shown in Connect gradient cables at back of magnet on page 147.
6.9.3.2 Replace gradient cable bracket and clamps at rear of magnet

1. Remove safety shield from gradient cable lead board.
2. Remove screws that fasten the cable clamps to the gradient cable lead board.
Figure 80 Magnet cable bracket and clamps
3. Remove screws that secure the cable support bracket to the gradient cable lead board. Discard all
three clamps and the cable support bracket.
4. Install the new magnet room cable support bracket included in the hardware kit that came with the
gradient cables.
Figure 81 Cable bracket and clamp identification
NOTE
The support bracket has one cable slot with a larger diameter than the other two. Be
sure to install the support bracket so this larger slot is on the right side when viewed
from the front of the PGR cabinet. This larger slot is sized to fit the Z-cable.
5. Refer to the above illustration to determine proper clamps to attach to the support bracket.
6. Loosely attach the appropriate clamps and with the screws provided. Cables will be installed in the
next procedure.
6.9.3.3 Connect gradient cables at back of magnet

Install gradient wires and ground cables to the busbar terminals as specified in this procedure. The
correct torque and installation order of hardware is necessary for long-term stability of the gradient
subsystem.
NOTICE
Cables must be installed in the correct order as indicated in the #/

SL16525846-1094516. As viewed from the rear of the magnet, install “Y” on
the left, “Z” in the middle, and “X” on the right side of the back of the
magnet. Red cables are installed on “+” terminals. Black cables are installed
on “-“ terminals.
Figure 82 Gradient cable connections (back of magnet, safety shield removed)
Item Description
1 Gradient cable
2 Gradient cable clamps
3 Red (+) and black (-) gradient wires
4 Busbar terminal connections (lug, Nord-Lock washer, and brass nut)
5 Ground stud
1. Remove the safety shield covering the busbar terminals on the back of the magnet.
2. Position the braided shielding of the gradient cable in the clamp.
3. Install the clamp around the cable shielding, but do not tighten completely. Adjustment may be
necessary as the terminal ends of the wires are attached.
NOTE
Nord-Lock washers must be used as shown in the following illustrations during the
installation.
• The Nord-Lock washer consists of two washers with teeth facing inwards. Do
not take the washers apart.
• If the Nord-Lock washers are separated, or the nuts are untightened, discard
the washers and replace them with new Nord-Lock washers only. If new Nord-
Lock washers are not available, contact the online center for further
instructions.
Figure 83 Nord-Lock washer
Item Description
1 Wrong (do not use separated washers)
2 Correct
4. If any hardware is present on the busbar studs, remove it before installing cables. The cable
connection must be in direct contact with the busbar terminal.
NOTE
In the following steps, install the cable lugs and hardware to the busbar studs in the
order shown in the following illustrations. Make sure the lug is installed first and the
Nord-Lock washer is installed between the lug and brass nut as shown.
Figure 84 Order of installation
Item Description
1 Wrong (Nord-Lock washer on wrong side of lug)
2 Correct order of installation
3 Brass nut
4 Nord-Lock washer
5. Position lugs on the appropriate studs as marked. Place red wires on “+” studs and black wires on “-
“ studs for the “Y”, “Z”, and “X” gradient cables as marked on the busbar assembly.
Figure 85 Proper installation of gradient wire to busbar stud
Item Description
1 Lug
2 Nord-Lock washer
3 Brass nut
6. Install Nord-Lock washers over the lugs.

7. Torque a brass nut on each stud to 25 ft lbs (34 Nm) with an adjustable nonmagnetic torque wrench
(part number 5534134). When torqued, the stud must extend beyond the end of the nut.
8. Install the ground wire for each gradient cable to the ground studs as shown in #/
SL16525867-1094516. The “Y” ground wire is installed on the left ground stud. The “Z” and “X”
ground wires are connected together on the right ground stud, back to back.
9. Install the safety shield over the busbar terminals.
6.9.3.4 Cut gradient cable to length at SPW

NOTICE
When cutting cables, be sure to allow for a small amount slack in case
cables need to be re-crimped.
The following steps will provide instructions for exposing the cable braid, cutting to length and
terminating the red and black wires for connection to the studs on the bottom of the Gradient Filter. See
the following illustration.
NOTE
Allow for some slack in the cables before cutting to length. Slack will allow for re-
termination if required.
Figure 86 Trimming gradient cables
1. Position cables at U-bolt clamp at side of SPW (Secondary Pen Wall) and mark each cable
2. From the mark on each cable, measure and cut each cable according to chart below:
X Y Z
Cut to length from Mark 20 Inches (508 mm) 22 Inches (559 mm) 25 Inches (635 mm)
3. To expose braid, remove outer cable jacket to mark created in Step 2.
a. Before cutting the outer jacket, place the large hook onto the stripper. While pushing up on the
small hook, push the large hook into the hook release until a click is heard. Remove the small
hook. Slide the large hook into the stripper until a click is heard.
Figure 87 Large hook installation
Item Description
1 Large hook
2 Stripper tool
3 Hook release
b. Position the wire stripper around the outer jacket of the gradient cable and adjust the blade
depth to the minimum thickness of the outer insulation (do not cut through the braid).
Figure 88 Blade depth adjustment
Item Description
1 Blade
2 Outer Insulation
c. Place the stripper onto the desired mark made in Cut gradient cable to length at SPW on
page 152. Rotate the stripper clockwise around the outer jacket. Keep the stripper on the
jacket at the desired mark, pull back on the handle to remove the blade from the jacket
material, rotate the blade 90 degrees (turn the handle from ' -- ' mark to ' | ' mark). Then allow
the tool to re-enter the material and strip the jacket lengthwise to remove the outer jacket.
Figure 89 Rotate tool
Item Description
1 Rotate the tool around the jacket
2 rotate the blade 90 degrees
3 Cut the jacket lengthwise
d. Remove the foil shield exposing the braid shield.
Figure 90 Foil shield and braid shield
Item Description
1 Foil shield
2 Braid shield
4. Measure and mark 3.5 inches (90 mm) from the edge of the outer cable jacket.
a. Push the braid up to the 3.5 inch mark to form a safe area. Cut the shield using a diagonal head
semi-flush or shear wire cutter. Do not use a knife, this may cut into the 1 AWG wires.
Figure 91 Cutting the braid shield
b. Remove the white gradient cable packing to the end of the braided shield.
• (For the X or Y axis) Expose the 4 conductor 1 AWG and the single 6 AWG ground.
• (For the Z axis) Expose the 4 conductor 2/0 AWG and the single 6 AWG ground.
Figure 92 Cable packing
5. On the end of each cable jacket, apply the provided yellow and green tape to the cable. Also apply
the applicable cable label for each Run: Run M3317 = FILT X, RUN M3318 = FILT Y, RUN M3419 = FILT
Z.
6. Apply electrical tape around the edge of the braid to prevent braid unraveling. Do not apply tape
over gradient lug. Gradient lug must be available for inspection.
Figure 93 Taping braid
7. Measure the excess cut cable. Inform the GE Field Engineer the length of the excess cut cable. The
data will be used for future gradient cable design.
8. Discard the remaining cable.
6.9.3.5 Connect gradient cable wires to gradient filter
Figure 94 Gradient cable connection information
1. Remove plastic shield.

2. Position the X, Y, and Z gradient cables on bracket and tighten U-bolts around braided section of
each cable.
NOTE
U-bolts are located on side of bracket away from the gradient filter.
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO GRADIENT CABLES
Over tightening of U-bolts in mounting bracket can damage gradient
cables.
Do not over tighten U-bolts.
3. Terminal attachment locations: Black wires = X-, Y-, Z-. Red wires = X+, Y+, Z+.
4. Note the back-to-back position of the terminals attached to studs. Before crimping terminals onto
wires, position and mark cables as to alignment of terminals for ease of fastening crimped
terminals to studs.
NOTE
See Connect gradient cable wires to gradient filter on page 157 for the order of
installation of cables on studs. Adjustment to lengths of any of the red or black wires
may be necessary to accommodate connections to studs.
5. Use the lug to determine the strip length. Mark the cable strip location.
Figure 95 Determine length
6. Strip the wires using the Greenlee 1903 wire stripper supplied in the GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit
5790054.
a. Position the stripper over the end of the cable. Rotate the silver blade head in a clockwise or
counter clockwise direction to decrease or increase the top blade cutting depth. Determine
the blade depth to avoid gradient cable strand damage.
NOTE
Do not touch the wire strands with the blade.
Figure 96 Setting blade depth
b. Turn the blade to the ( -- ) mark. Lift the spring-loaded hook and position the stripper on the
cable mark. Rotate the tool clockwise around the cable until adequate penetration of the
insulation is achieved.
Figure 97 Tool position
c. While the stripper is still on the wire, turn the blade 90 degrees to the ( | ) mark. Cut
lengthwise to remove the insulation.
Figure 98 Insulation removal
7. Label each of the five wires in each gradient cable wire per table in Figure 94 on page 157. Red
wires are “+”, Black wires are “-”.
NOTICE
Make sure terminals are positioned correctly as shown below.

•
8. Route and cut ground wires to length. Strip length determined by holding the lug on the end of the
cable. See Figure 95 on page 158. Crimp a furnished T & B 54105 terminal on each ground wire.
Connect wires as indicated.
NOTE
Do not over tighten GND studs.
9. Using the two-wrench method, hold the ground stud with one wrench and tighten the hex nut with
the other wrench until tight.
NOTICE
In the next step, make sure the terminals are positioned correctly
before crimping.
NOTE
All the wire strands from the gradient leads are required for a secure crimp.
NOTE
To ensure the lugs remain flat when they are placed back-to-back, position the crimp
tool so that the flat side of the crimp on the top lug is flush with the flat side of the
bottom lug.
10. Use only the TBM5 or the TBM5-S supplied in GEHC Gradient Cable Tool Kit 5790054 and the
furnished T&B lugs (54150 - X and Y gradient cable, 54160 - Z gradient cable and 54105 - GND
gradient cable). Position the lug in die grooves of the tool so the die is between the outer color-
coded marks. Crimp the terminals on the wires.
Figure 99 Lug placement on crimp tool
Item Description
1 Wire
2 Die
3 Lug
4 Crimp tool
11. Place lugs into position on the gradient filter.

12. Using the 2 wrench method, hold the hex nut with one wrench and tighten the Spiralock hex nut
with the other wrench until tight. Repeat for all lugs.
Figure 100 Tighten lugs
Item Description
1 Hex nut
2 Spiralock nut
13. Install the plastic safety shield.
6.10 Connect magnet ground, Run M4005

Make sure magnet ground cable, Run M4005, is connected to GND stud at back of magnet. Other end of
ground cable is routed through overhead cable trays and connected to RF Screen Room common
ground. Refer to cable map.
NOTE
If ground stud on back magnet flange is not available, route Run M4005 to either rear
magnet leg. Connect to ground stud on inside of leg.
Figure 101 Connect magnet ground (typical magnet shown)
6.11 Position rear pedestal

The rear pedestal has been delivered to site with instructions on how to unload it from the shipping
pallet. After unloading the rear pedestal, move it to rear of magnet.
The rear pedestal should initially positioned about 18 inches (458mm) from the installed position - the
distance between the front and rear split bridge - when connected to magnet. All cables and hoses will
be connected to rear pedestal in this position. This will provide a service loop for any future
maintenance or other service procedures.
Hoses routed to the rear end bell will also be connected before Rear Pedestal is moved to its final
position and attached to the magnet.
Figure 102 Initial position of rear pedestal (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T shown)
NOTE
For Artist and Artist XT systems, the Rear Pedestal does not include the RF Hub shown in
the illustration.
1. Position the front surface of the bridge on the Rear Pedestal about 18 inches (458 mm) from the
normally installed position.
2. Lower the four leveling feet until wheels of front and rear shipping brackets are not touching the
floor.
3. Remove front and rear wheeled shipping brackets.
4. IMPORTANT! The I and Q cables from the Hybrid Splitter are routed, connected, insulated, and tie-
wrapped in place. DO NOT cut tie-wraps or alter routed path.
6.12 RF transmit cable installation

6.12.1 Route and connect in equipment room
It is recommended that the RF Transmit cables be routed through the overhead cable tray after the
gradient cables have been routed and before any of the other cables are installed.
NOTE
The equipment room RF transmit cables, Runs E1001 and E1002 are delivered to site pre-
terminated and must not be cut to length.
Figure 103 Equipment room RF cable routing
2. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray, route the had and body cables marked for connection to
the PGR cabinet through the designated overhead cable tray towards the PGR cabinet. Position in
the cable tray as shown in Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays.
3. Route the ends of the cable to the top of the PGR cabinet and connect as marked to J18 and J19.
4. Connect other ends of RF Transmit cables as marked to J128 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist) and
J106 on SPW.
5. Coil and store excess cable length in overhead cable tray.
6.12.2 Route and connect in magnet room

It is recommended that the RF transmit cables be routed thru the overhead cable tray after the gradient
cables have been routed and before any of the other cables are installed.
NOTE
The magnet room RF transmit cables, Runs M1306 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T),
M1001 and M1305 are delivered to site pre-terminated and MUST NOT BE CUT TO
LENGTH.
2. Starting at the SPW end of the cable tray, route body cable M1001 and Head cables M1306
(MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) and M1305 through the designated overhead cable tray towards
the rear of the magnet. Position in the cable tray as shown in Cable Locations in Magnet Room
Overhead Cable Trays.
Figure 104 Magnet room RF cable connections
3. Route Run M1001 along outside of right-rear flange of magnet, tie-wrap in place, and connect as
marked to J1 on MAG-HYB.
4. Route Runs M1306 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) and M1305 along outside of right-rear flange
of magnet, towards the I/O bracket on the rear pedestal, and tie-wrap in place.
5. Connect Run M1305 to J1 on rear pedestal I/O panel.
6. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) Connect Run M1306 to J2 on rear pedestal I/O panel.
Figure 105 Connect RF cables to SPW
7. Connect Run M1001 to J106 on SPW. Two people, one on each side of SPW, are needed to connect
M1001 and E1001 to SPW.
NOTICE
Do NOT install O-Ring or Grease that may be provided with Cable

Termination Kit. Installation of these parts will prevent the ground from
making contact resulting in RF leaks.
8. Insert interface pin into one of the connectors. At J106, align connectors on each side of
penetration panel and push together. Fasten together using three of each of the following:
• 1/4-20 x 1.25 hex head bolt (brass)
• 1/4 screw size lock washer (phos bronze)
• 1/4-20, 7/16 inch hex x 3/16 inch thk nut (brass)
NOTE
The flat washer provided with the termination kit may be discarded to facilitate
installation of connectors to Penetration Panel.
9. Connect M1305 and M1306 as applicable.

a. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) Connect Run M1305 to J122 (N.O.) and Run M1306 to
J120 (N.C.) on the transmit switch.
b. (For Artist and Artist XT) Connect Run M1305 to J128 on the SPW.
10. Coil and store excess cable length of M1001, M1305, and M1306 (as applicable) on cable hooks in
penetration panel closet.
NOTE
The coil radius must be greater than the minimum bend radius for these cables. The
minimum bend radii for these cables, which can also be found in the Cable
Specification table in Appendix are:
• M1001 = 9 inches (229 mm)
• M1305 = 6 inches (152 mm)
• M1306 = 6 inches (152 mm)
6.13 Route and connect ground cables

6.13.1 PGR cabinet ground cables
The following ground cables are routed from the operator workspace, HEC cabinet, PEN cabinet, and RF
common ground stud.
Figure 106 PGR cabinet ground connections
1. Route E4005 from RF common ground stud on screen room and connect to ground stud in PGR
cabinet.
2. Route and connect the following to the PGR ground terminal as shown below:
• E4002 from PEN cabinet.
• E4007 from HEC cabinet.

• E4008 from OW.
6.13.2 Penetration panel and SPW ground cables

The ground cables in the following two steps are installed on the equipment room side of the panels.
Figure 107 Pen panel and SPW ground connections
1. Route and connect E4010 from RF common ground stud on screen room to ground stud in
penetration panel.
2. Route and connect E4009 from RF common ground stud on screen room to ground stud at bottom
of SPW.
3. Route and connect E4005 from RF common ground stud on screen room to ground stud in PGR
cabinet.
6.14 Route and connect equipment room power

cables
To complete the grounding and leakage current checks procedure, only the power and ground cables can
be connected. The test must be completed before any of the data cables can be connected.
NOTE
For efficiency purposes, all the cables can be routed through the overhead cable trays but
only the power and ground can be connected for this test.
NOTICE
Do not connect data cables until the grounding and leakage test has been
completed.
Ground cables were routed and connected in Route and Connect Ground Cables. Connect the following
power cables.
• E0003, PGR J102 to OW-PDM J1
• E0004, PGR J16 to PEN J1
• E0009, HEC CRY power to CRY power
• MagMon3 power cable to HEC
Make sure the following has been completed.

• Customer-supplied power from MDP CB2 to PGR CB1
• Customer-supplied power from MDP CB3 to HEC power
(For Artist and Artist XT systems) Route MEMS DC power cable (5748797) from MEMS-J2 in the PEN
cabinet to J57 on the PEN wall. Mate the cable end at J57 through the opening to M3392 in the magnet
room.
Software version DV29 and later introduces support for a non-MEMS system configuration. Existing or
upgraded systems will continue to use the MEMS power supply. Newly installed systems may not have
the MEMS power supply. Identify the presence or absence of MEMS on your system by looking for the
MEMS DC Power Supply Assembly (part number 6859128) in the power supply rack of the ISC.
Figure 108 MEMS DC power cable at J57, mated to M3392 (Artist and Artist XT)
NOTE
The Route and Connect Equipment Room Data Cables section provides instructions on
routing and connecting all cables in the equipment room.
The Operator Workspace section provides instructions on routing and connecting all
cables in the operator workspace.
6.15 Route and connect equipment room data

cables
Refer to Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays for positioning of cables and hoses
routed in equipment room in the overhead cable routing mechanisms. Make sure cables are in their
designated areas.
6.15.1 PGR cabinet cables

Figure 109 PGR cable connections
1. Route the cables through the assigned channel in the 24-inch overhead cable routing mechanism
(cable tray) to the cables final connection point.
2. Refer to cable map and connect remainder of data cables to top of PGR Cabinet after Grounding
and Leakage test has been completed. Some cables are pre-connected to the PGR cabinet as
explained in Product Delivery Instructions
3. Refer to Storage of Excess Cable Length for coiling of any excess cable in the overhead cable trays.
4. At J16 and J102, install connector bracket (5314434) on mounting standoffs to hold power cable
Runs E0004 and E0003 in place. Bracket is part of Desktop Collector (2321156-26).
6.15.2 HEC cabinet cables

Make sure that LOTO has been applied to HEC circuit breakers before installing and connecting any HEC
cables or hoses. Refer to the Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO) section in Chapter 1.
Refer to cable map and route remainder of cables to HEC cabinet. Connect data cables after grounding
and leakage test has been completed.
Figure 110 HEC cable connections
1. Connect the ground wire E4007 from the PGR cabinet to ground stud at top of cabinet.
NOTE
If ground wire is difficult to attach at location indicated in illustration, then connect
E4007 to ground stud on opposite wall of cabinet. For proper ground, make sure the
ground wire contacts bare metal.
2. Connect Run E3013 to J12 CAT5.
3. Connect Run E3028 to J11 RS232.
4. Run E3026 should have already been connected to J24 CRY CPRSR FL & TEMP.
5. Magnet Monitor power cable, Run E3006, should have already been connected to the customer
supplied power outlet.
6.15.3 PEN cabinet cables

Refer to cable map and route cables to PEN cabinet. Connect after ground resistance test has been
completed. Some cables are pre-connected to the PEN cabinet as explained in Product Delivery
Instructions, those cables need to be routed from PEN to the appropriate location through the cable
tray.
NOTICE
FOR SYSTEM WITH SRPS ONLY - Before connecting cables, make sure that
the SRPS Dongle (5172838-2) has been connected to J50 on either the PEN
Panel or the back of the PEN Panel.
Figure 111 PEN cable connections
1. Route Runs E3017 and E3018 from OW and connect to J10 and J12 as marked.
2. Route Runs E3020 from MagMon and connect to J13 as marked.
3. Route Power cable Run E0004 from PGR cabinet and connect to J1. Install Connector Bracket
(5314434) on mounting standoffs to hold E0004 in place. Bracket is part of Desktop Collector
(2321156-26).
4. Route fiber optic cable runs to the magnet.
a. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM) Route fiber optic cable Runs P2004 (32 channel) and P2003
through J20 and through wave guide in Pen panel to magnet.
b. (For Artist T) Route fiber optic cable Run P2003 through J20 and through wave guide in Pen
Panel to magnet.
c. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route fiber optic cable Runs P2003, P2004, and P2006 through J20
and through wave guide in Pen panel to magnet.
5. Route fiber optic cable Runs E2020 and E2023 through J17, and J18 as marked. For XGD only (not
XG2), route fiber optic cable Run E2002 through J19. Refer to Install Fiber Optic Cables for
connection of fiber optic wires inside of PEN cabinet.
6. Route Coax/RF Runs E1003, E1004, and E1005 from PGR cabinet and connect to J5, J6, and J15.
7. Route signal cable Runs E3002, E3006, E3008 and E3009 from PGR cabinet and connect to J11, J14,
J9, & J3.
8. Route and connect GND cable Run E4002 to ground stud.
9. For systems with ICE, route coax/RF Run E1307 from PGR cabinet and connect to J23.
10. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route the MEMS inhibit cable (5748796) from MEMS-J3 in the PEN
cabinet to PEN wall J56. Mate the cable end through the opening at J56 to M3316 in the magnet
room.
11. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route Run E3391 from PGR-J30 to PEN wall J55. Mate the cable end
through the opening at J55 to M3391 in the magnet room.
Figure 112 PEN wall J55 and J56 (Artist and Artist XT, shown from equipment room)
1 PEN-J56 (mate MEMS inhibit cable to M3316)

2 PEN-J55 (mate E3391 to M3391)
6.15.4 Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) cables

The SPW was delivered to site and installed prior to magnet delivery.
• The gas lines, Runs 621 and 622, were routed through the J110 and J111 waveguides when the
magnet was installed.
• The gradient cables were routed and connected to the gradient filter in a previous procedure in the
section.
• The coolant lines have been routed through J100 and J101 waveguides.
• The 4 inch air hose from the PGR cabinet has been routed to J104 waveguide.
Refer to cable map and connect remaining cables to SPW after grounding and leakage test has been
completed.
Figure 113 SPW cable connections
1. Run E1001, Body TX, should have already been routed and connected to J106.
2. Route and connect Run E1002, Head TX, to J128
3. Route and connect Runs E3022 and E3023 from MagMon to J116 and J117.
4. Route and connect Run E3030 from E-Off Switch to J115.
5. Route and connect Run E3031 from GOC to J118.
6. Remove safety cover. Route and connect Run 623 to F1 and F3. Replace safety cover.
6.16 Install temperature/humidity sensor

components in equipment room
Dependent on configuration delivered to the site, the iButton can be installed on the PEN or PGR
cabinets.
• On systems with XGD only, the iButton and the sensor cable are to be installed and connected to
J43 on PHPS2 module.
• On systems with XG2 only, connect the iButton to the previously installed sensor cable connected
to J3 on the PEM module.
Select the applicable installation instruction from the following two procedures.
6.16.1 PEN cabinet installation

Figure 114 Component installation
1. Retrieve the iButton sensor (5317298) from the Desktop Collector kit (2321156-26) and attach to
top of PEN cabinet using dual locking tape.
2. Connect RJ11 sensor cable (5317299) to iButton and route to rear of PHPS2 module in PEN cabinet.
3. At J43 on rear of PHPS2 module, install DB9 to RJ11 adapter (5318097).
4. Connect end of RJ11 sensor cable to RJ11 adapter.
6.16.2 PGR cabinet installation

Figure 115 PGR cabinet iButton installation
1. Pre-installed sensor cable routed and connected to J3 on PEM module.

2. Retrieve the iButton sensor (5317298) from the Desktop Collector kit (2321156-26) and connect to
sensor cable at top of PGR cabinet using dual locking tape.
6.17 Install RF door switch Run E3014

Run E3014 is a 100 ft cable with a 9-pin sub-miniature D plug on one end. The other end is cut off with
the black and red leads from pair #1 dressed for connecting to a switch. Should it be desired to cut off
excess length, make sure that the black and red leads have continuity to pins 1 and 6 on the 9 pin sub-
miniature D plug.
1. Connect Run E3014 to J20 on PGR cabinet and route to RF door switch.
2. Connect black lead on Run E3014 to RF door switch COM (common) contact.
3. If RF door switch is normally open, proceed to step 4. If normally closed, proceed to step 5.
4. Connect red lead on Run E3014 to RF door switch N.O. (normally open) contact.
5. If RF door switch is not normally open, connect red lead on Run E3014 to RF door switch N.C.
(normally closed) contact.
6.18 Install blower box on penetration panel

NOTE
The blower box can be installed later in the installation process. Make sure that the area
where the blower box is to be installed will stay clear of any routed cables and hoses.
Note that the blower box is delivered in the magnet room lean cart.
NOTE
If slot on mounting flange does not provide enough clearance for placement over existing
flange studs, remove mounting screws in step 1, position blower box on SPW, and attach
with removed screws. At least two people are required for this procedure.
1. Loosen, but do not remove, four screws securing top of Pen panel.
Figure 116 Blower box installation
2. Lift and slide Blower Box (5213397 for MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T systems; or 5213397-200
newer Artist/XT systems) mounting holes over loosened screws. Tighten the four screws to secure
blower box to Pen panel frame.
NOTE
Figure 116 on page 179 shows Blower Box 5213397. The newer Artist/XT blower box
only has one blower output for patient air. It does not include an output for the rear
pedestal.
3. Route power cord to bottom of Pen panel and remove safety power cover.
4. Connect power cord wires as marked to the connection points. For Artist/XT, do not connect F5 or
F6 wires. Bend these wires back against the length of the power cable jacket. Secure the wires by
wrapping electrical tape around the eyelet terminals to prevent electrical contact with the AC
power filter connections.
Figure 117 F5 and F6 wires secured with electrical tape (Artist and Artist XT only)
5. Re-attach safety power cover making sure that power cord is routed through access hole.
6.19 Install air and water hoses

Refer to Section Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays for the position of cables
and hoses routed in Equipment Room in the overhead cable trays. Make sure cables are in their
designated areas of the trays.
Hose and fitting installation notes:
• To prevent cracking of fittings, hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare
connections are being made.
• Trim extra length off of hose clamps after applying clamp to the hoses. Smooth rough edges.
• DO NOT use Teflon tape on threads that have a flare fitting (female and flare).
Figure 118 Flare fitting assembly
• A small amount of water may be applied to push-lok barbs to facilitate insertion into hoses.
NOTICE
For hoses requiring insulation - if preferable, the insulation sections can be

installed around the hoses and seams between sections secured with black
duct tape before routing in overhead cable trays.
Figure 119 Air and water hose installation schematic
NOTICE
Make sure that LOTO has been applied to HEC circuit breakers before
installing and connecting any HEC cables or hoses. Refer to Lock Out Tag
Out (LOTO) Section in Chapter 1.
6.19.1 Route and connect coolant hoses between PGR and HEC
Refer to Figure 119 on page 182 for part numbers and description of hose hardware.
Figure 120 Hoses between PGR and HEC
1. Route RED (5264033) and GREEN (5264066) coolant hoses from HEC cabinet thru the designated
overhead cable tray to PGR cabinet.
2. Cut to length.
NOTE
At each cabinet, ball and check valves are to be installed in each hose at a location of
1 to 3 feet (300 to 900 mm) outside the cabinet. Make sure the distance measured is
outside the perimeter of the top of the cabinet.
3. Cut each hose at the appropriate 1 to 3 foot mark outside the cabinet, as mentioned above.
4. At PGR, install 1 inch ball valve assembly (5338544).
5. At HEC cabinet, install 1 inch check valve assembly (5338545). Make sure valves are installed in the
correct directions.
6. Insert 1 inch flare to Push-Lok connector (5263572) at ends of each hose. DO NOT use Teflon tape
on threads.
NOTE
To prevent cracking of fittings when attaching flare connectors to cabinet connection
points, hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare connections are
being made.
7. Connect RED and GREEN hoses to top of PGR and HEC cabinets as marked.
8. Check for leaks.
6.19.2 Route and connect coolant hoses between cryogen

compressor and HEC
The installation procedures for installing the hoses, barbs, and the insulation sleeves between the
cryogen compressor and the HEC was part of Direction 5500097, Pre-Magnet Delivery System
Installation manual. Refer to Direction 5500097 for instructions, if needed.
Verify that insulation sleeves have been installed on each hose.
Figure 121 Hoses between cryogen compressor and HEC
6.19.3 Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in

equipment room
NOTE
To prevent cracking of fittings when attaching flare connectors to cabinet connection
points, hold fittings in the HEC stationary with wrench while flare connections are being
made.
Figure 122 Gradient coil coolant hoses in equipment room
1. Route BLUE and BLACK coolant hoses from HEC Cabinet the designated overhead cable tray to
wave guides J100 and J101 in SPW. Route through wave guides to rear of magnet. Refer to
6.19.4 Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in magnet room on page 186 for routing
and connection of Gradient Coil cooling water hoses in magnet room.
2. Cut coolant hoses to length at HEC cabinet.
3. At the HEC Cabinet, for both the BLUE and BLACK hoses, check valves are to be installed in each
hose at a location of 1 to 3 feet (300 to 900mm) outside the cabinet. Make sure the distance
measured is outside the perimeter of the top of the cabinet. Cut each hose.
4. Install Check Valve assembly (5338545) for each hose between cut ends. Make sure valve is
installed in the correct direction.
5. At the end of each hose, install a 1 inch 37 degree Female Push-Lok Swivel fitting (5263572). DO
NOT use Teflon tape on threads.
6. Connect each hose to designated RETURN inlet (BLACK) and SUPPLY outlet (BLUE) at top of HEC
Cabinet.
7. Install insulation sleeves (5225968) around the 1 inch water coolant hoses in both the Magnet and
Equipment rooms. Using black duct tape, tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent
gaps.
6.19.4 Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in

magnet room
One Inch Ball Valve assemblies (5338543) will be installed in each hose.
Figure 123 Gradient coil coolant hoses in magnet room
1. Hoses were routed in 6.19.3 Route and connect gradient coil water coolant hoses in equipment
room on page 184 from HEC through SPW to rear of magnet and cut to length.
2. NOTE: It is important that the ball valve assembly with beaded hose barb and clamp (5338543) be
inserted and clamped to hose routed from the gradient coil. Orientation shown below.
3. Attach each ball valve and fitting assembly to BLACK and BLUE hoses as shown.
4. Install hose clamp on gradient coil hose below the ball valve on the BLACK and BLUE hoses.
5. Install insulation sleeves (5225968) around 1 inch water coolant hoses in both the Magnet and
Equipment rooms. Using black duct tape, tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent
gaps.
NOTE
When handle is perpendicular to hose, ball valve is closed.
6.19.5 Apply insulation on fittings

NOTICE
Do not apply the cork/rubber insulation wrap until after all leak checks have
been completed by FE.
The Cork/Rubber Insulation Wrap (5268212) must be applied to all gradient coil and cryogen compressor
hose connection points.
Figure 124 Applying insulation
1. Apply and secure a length of insulation wrap to cover the BLUE hose connection.
2. Repeat process in Step 1 for the GREEN, BLACK, RED, GREY, and YELLOW hoses at the top of the
HEC cabinet.
3. Repeat process in Step 1 for the GREY and YELLOW hoses at the cryogen compressor.
4. Repeat process in Step 1 for the BLACK hose at the rear of the magnet connecting to the gradient
coil.
5. Repeat process in Step 1 for the BLUE hose at the rear of the magnet connecting to the gradient
coil.
6.19.6 Route and connect air coolant hoses between HEC and
SPW
NOTE
Trim extra length off of hose clamps after applying clamp to the hoses. Smooth rough
edges.
Figure 125 Air hoses between HEC and SPW
1. Route 4 inch SUPPLY air hose (46-282666Pxx) in the designated overhead cable tray from SPW to
the HEC.
2. Make sure there is enough length for insulation that will be applied around the hose in Step 9. Cut
to length.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for routing and cutting 4 inch RETURN air hose, with the exception of
insulation installation.
4. Remove and discard cap and install 3inch PVC Socket Connection (5267835).
5. Connect 4 inch SUPPLY air hose to top of HEC cabinet marked SUPPLY with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
6. Connect 4 inch RETURN air hose to top of HEC cabinet marked RETURN with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
7. Connect other end of 4 inch SUPPLY air hose to J104 on SPW and secure with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
8. Connect other end of 4 inch RETURN air hose to J105 on SPW and secure with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
9. Attach insulation sleeves (5225963) to SUPPLY 4 inch hose. Using black duct tape, tape the seams
between sections of insulation to prevent gaps. Insulation sleeve on RETURN is optional.
6.19.7 Route and connect air coolant hoses between SPW and
body coil
NOTE
edges.
Figure 126 Air hoses between SPW and gradient coil
1. At rear of magnet, install two 1.5 inch, 6 meter long, Air Hoses (46-282666P18) on the two sockets.
Final position of hoses will be under bridge.
2. The Air Y-Fitting (5344836) can be positioned to within 2 feet (588mm) of the end of the overhead
cable trays close to the rear of the magnet. Route each 1 1/2 inch air hose into overhead cable
trays, cut to length if necessary, and attach to Air Y-Fitting with 1 1/2 inch hose clamp (5127523) on
each hose.
3. Secure each air hose to rear flange of magnet using provided tie-wraps.
4. Route 4 inch Air Hose (46-282666Pxx) in overhead cable tray and attach to Air Y-fitting with 4 inch
hose clamp (5266749).
5. At J104 waveguide on SPW, cut air hose to length and attach to waveguide with 4 inch hose clamp
(5266749).
6. Attach insulation sleeves (5345246) to 1 1/2 inch hose from end bell to Y-fitting. Using black duct
tape, tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent gaps.
7. Attach insulation sleeves (5225963) to 4 inch hose from SPW to Y-fitting. Using black duct tape,
tape the seams between sections of insulation to prevent gaps.
8. Air Filter (5290917) should have been installed with SPW and attached with Hose Clamp
(5263772-3).
6.19.8 Route and connect air hose between blower box and rear
endbell
This hose is installed to provide air for patient comfort.
NOTE
edges.
Figure 127 Installing patient comfort air hose
1. At rear of magnet, install 3 inch, 3 meter long, Patient Air Hose (5213158) on the top of the rear end
bell. Secure with 3 inch hose clamp (5265190).
2. Route entire length of 3 inch air hose into overhead cable trays and attach to PVC Reducer
(5198521) with 3 inch hose clamp (5265190).
3. Route 4 inch, 11 meter long, Air Hose (5199506-2) in overhead cable tray and attach to PVC reducer
with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
4. At the blower box, cut patient comfort air hose to length and attach to the left side flange labeled
Patient Air with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
6.19.9 Route and connect air hose between blower box and rear
pedestal
NOTE
The rear pedestal air hose is only installed on MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T
systems.
Figure 128 Installing rear pedestal air hose
1. Route 4 inch, 14 meter long, RF HUB Air Hose (5199506-3) in overhead cable tray to rear pedestal.
2. Attach hose to socket on rear pedestal with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
3. Secure air hose to rear flange of magnet using provided tie-wraps.
4. At the Blower Box, cut rear pedestal air hose to length and attach to the right side flange labeled RF
HUB Air with 4 inch hose clamp (5266749).
6.20 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - GEM style

enclosure
This section provides installation procedures for installing the cables, brackets, and monitor for the GEM
system.
Table 10 Required Hardware
Step Part Number Description Quantity
1 2109873-14* M4 X 10 screw 1
3 2109867-15* M6 X 25 hex socket head 1

cap screw
7 * Brass M10 x 16 screw nut 1
2109878-4* M10 Flat Washer 1
9 1000-M6C040-31 M6 X 40 hex socket head 2

cap screw
3002-M6C-31 M6 hex nut 2
14 2109873-24 M6 X 12 screw 1
* Fastener comes pre-attached to referenced assembly
Figure 129 Install brackets and cables
1. Attach Cable Tie Mount base (46-208746P9) to plate with one (1) M4 X 10 screw (2109873-14)
2. Air sensor bracket should be attached to plate.
3. Attach Run M3366 to arm with one (1) M6 X 25 hex socket head cap screw (2109867-15). Do not
tighten at this time.
4. Route the ground wire and fiber optic cable adjacent to main cable, one on each side. Do not tie
wrap either one to the tie mount. Both are to remain free sliding.
5. Slide tie-wrap through the mount to hold cable in place. Do not tighten.
6. Route fiber optic cable to top of magnet and connect to J28 on the fiber optic I/O board.
7. Connect the monitor cable assembly ground wire to the front ground stud using one (1) Brass M10
x 16 screw nut and one (1) M10 Flat Washer (2109878-4).
8. Locate the IRD Pivot Assembly (5394815).
9. Attach the IRD Pivot Assembly to IRD mounting plate using two (2) M6 X 40 hex socket head cap
screws (1000-M6C040-31) and two (2) M6 hex nuts (3002-M6C-31).
10. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 1 to the left side of the front of magnet.
11. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 2 to the right side of the front of magnet
12. Route cable marked MAG-J2 to the top of the magnet and connect to J2 on the magnet I/O board.
Figure 130 Install IRD monitor
13. Remove cable clamp from Run M3366 cable assembly. Insert a small screwdriver into the side of
the clamp that says Open until clamp releases.
14. Attach the cable clamp to the pivot assembly with one (1) M6 X 12 screw (2109873-24).
15. Locate the IRD monitor. Loosen, but do not remove, the top two screws on back of monitor.
16. Remove the two bottom screws on the back of the monitor and position monitor on IRD monitor
mounting plate.
17. Apply Loctite 242 to mounting screws.
18. Fasten the two bottom screws and tighten the two top screws to secure monitor to mounting
plate. Tighten with hex wrench #3.
19. Secure cable assembly into cable clamp on top of bracket and close clamp to secure cable.
20. Connect the three Run M3366 cables: ground, fiber optic, and power, to the back of the monitor.
6.21 In-Room Display (IRD) installation - MR450w

For systems installed with In-Room Display (IRD), the IRD monitor, Operator Control Panels (OCP), and
Run M3366 need to be installed and connected to the pre-routed cables.
NOTE
Two people are required to perform this procedure.
6.21.1 Install IRD components

If magnet does not have ground stud available for connecting IRD ground wire, make sure to follow
alternate ground wire attachment step below.
Figure 131 Attach Run M3366
1. Attach Cable Tie Mount base (46-208746P9) to plate with M4 X 10 screw (2109873-14).
NOTE
The Mount should be angles at about 45 degrees as shown.
2. Attach Run M3366 to Arm with (1) M6 X 25 hex socket head cap screw (2109867-15). Do not
tighten at this time.
3. Route the ground wire and fiber optic cable adjacent to main cable, one on each side. Do not tie
wrap either one to the tie mount. Both are to remain free sliding.
4. Slide tie-wrap through the mount to hold cable in place. Do not tighten.
5. Remove Cable Clamp from Run M3366 cable assembly. Insert a small screwdriver into the side of
the clamp that says Open until clamp releases.
Figure 132 Attach IRD mounting brackets
6. Pass the A end of the pivot bracket through the Interface Cover (5182762). (CAUTION: Do not pass
the B end, it will tear)
7. Fasten with (4) M4 x 20mm screws (2109867-6) and (4) M4 washers (2109867-6). Add Loctite 242.
Using a number 3 Allen, tighten screws.
8. Attach the cable clamp to the IRD mount (5435410-3) with M6 X 12 screw (2109873-24).
Figure 133 Secure Run M3366 to flexible housing
9. On the monitor interface cover, carefully turn inside-out the flexible tube housing to the other side
of the cover.
NOTE
Take special care, the flexible tube housing material can tear easily.
10. Pass connectors and tubing of Run M3366, the Scan Room Monitor Control cable (5149629),
through the monitor interface cover. Fasten together with tie-wrap to secure the cable assembly to
the interface cover. Trim excess from tie-wrap
11. After securing cables to the monitor interface cover, carefully return the flexible tube housing to its
original position,
Figure 134 Secure Run M3366
12. Tighten screw holding cable block to arm assembly.

13. Secure the tie-wrap around the gray cable only (through cable tie mount) of the scan room monitor
control cable assembly, Run M3366.
Figure 135 Attach bracket
14. Snap cable assembly into cable clamp on top of bracket and close clamp to secure.
15. Fasten the interface cover to the monitor mount board with (4) M6 x 16 screws (2109867-13) and 4
nylon washers (2229794).
Figure 136 Install laser mounting bracket
NOTE
If previously removed, reinstall the laser-mounting bracket (5178328) to the ring arm
using (2) M6 nylon washers (2229794) and (2) M6 x 16 screws (2109867-13).
16. Start right screw and washer. Slide bracket over slot. Add left screw. Be careful of wire position
when adding screws so they aren’t crimped behind bracket.
17. Route cable under IRD interface cover and out through the slot in the interface cover.
18. Tighten bracket with #5 Allen wrench.
Figure 137 Connect ground wire
19. Connect the monitor cable assembly ground wire to the front ground stud using (1) Brass M10 x 16
screw nut & (1) M10 SS washer (2109878-4). Note: An alternate ground stud is located on other
side of IRD mounting brackets.
NOTE
If above ground block is not available, the ground wire can be attached to the
alternate ground connection point on the magnet mounting ring using a M10 x 12mm
Socket Head Cap Screw, as shown above, at time of passive shimming when the front
end bell is removed.
Figure 138 Run M3366 cable connections
20. Route cable marked MAG-J2 to the top of the magnet and connect to J2 on the magnet I/O board
21. Route fiber optic cable to top of magnet and connect to J28 on the fiber optic I/O board
22. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 1 to the left side of the front of magnet
23. Route cable marked MAG-TRACK BALL 2 to the right side of the front of magnet
24. Attach cables to the magnet using cable clamps to ensure proper placement on the magnet.
6.21.2 Install IRD monitor

Figure 139 Monitor components
1. Locate the IRD Monitor.

2. Remove the top cover on the back of the monitor by pushing in at the arrows and sliding upwards.
3. Remove the two bottom screws on the back of the monitor.
4. Loosen, but do not remove, the top two screws on back of monitor and position monitor on IRD
mount plate.
5. Apply Loctite 242 to mounting screws.
6. Fasten the two bottom screws and hand tighten the two top screws to secure monitor to mounting
plate. Tighten with hex wrench #3.
7. Hand tighten the two top screws, then tighten with hex wrench #3.
8. Connect the three Run M3366 cables: ground, fiber optic, and power, to the back of the Monitor.
9. Replace top cover on to monitor.
6.21.3 Install left and right operator control panels

NOTICE
Take special care in connecting Runs M3366 and Estop cable. Any reverse
connection of these 9-pin Sub-D connectors will mean at system power-on
it will not be possible to recover the system from E-Stop condition.
Figure 140 Control panel installation
1. Locate the first Operator Control Panel (OCP).

2. Fasten to right front cover using the provided five M4 screws and M4 washers.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for installing the second OCP to the left front cover.
4. Connect emergency stop cables to Estop connector on left and right front covers.
5. Run M3337 will be connected to left and right OCP marked J1.
6. Run M3366 will be connected to left and right OCP marked Trackball.
6.21.4 Install front covers

Figure 141 Front covers components
1. Do not install washers when installing the four (4) M6 x 16 screws (2109867-13) that fasten the two
inside tabs of each front cover to the magnet.
2. Move Left Front Cover (5328961) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
25mm hex socket screws and M10 washers (46-294167P73) on all screws except the two that
attach the inside tabs as noted in Step 1.
3. Move Right Front Cover (5328960) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
4. Secure together left and right front covers at top and bottom of covers using M10 washers and M10
x 25mm screws.
5. Install vacuum port cover.
6. Attach left and right Front Trim Rings (5177586 & 5177586-2).
7. Install Front Bridge Cover (5328959) using provided fasteners.
8. The Laser Cover (5182894) will be installed, using the provided fasteners, after the dock is adjusted
and secured.
6.22 LED display installation

The LED display is only applicable to MR450w non-GEM installations.
For systems installed with LED display, the LED monitor and Operator Control Panels (OCP) need to be
installed and connected to the pre-routed cables.
NOTE
Two people are required to perform this procedure.
6.22.1 Remove monitor interface cover

Figure 142 Monitor interface cover
1. Unfasten the four screws attaching rubber interface cover to mounting plate.
2. Discard monitor interface cover and fasteners.
6.22.2 Install LED display

NOTE
Do NOT install any washers that may be supplied with the LED Display kit of components.
Figure 143 Display installation
1. Place the LED Display Bracket (5343349) over the mounting screws holes. Install, but do not
tighten, the upper two socket head cap screws.
2. Install the lower two socket head cap screws. Tighten all four socket head cap screws.
3. Attach Magnet Side LED Display Strap (5346326-2, 100vmm long) to mounting plate.
4. Route and connect Run M3349 to J4 and Run M3363 to J5 on back of LED Display Panel (5343350).
5. Attach LED display panel to bracket using four screws.
6. Attach Display Side LED Strap (5346326, 160mm long) to bezel using one screw.
7. If not already installed, attach Display Bezel Mounting Brace (5344837) to bezel using one screw.
8. Route Display Side Strap (5346326), that is attached to bezel, through hole in LED Display Panel
(5343350) and connect to magnet side strap.
NOTE
Complete the following two steps for fit and alignment. When complete, the bezel
has to be removed. It will be reinstalled after the front covers are installed later in this
procedure.
9. Attach Bezel (5346325) to LED Display Panel by carefully pressing and engaging the four poppers.
10. Fasten the Display Bezel Mounting Brace (5344837) to the magnet ring.
6.22.3 Install left and right OCPs

1. Locate the first OCP.
Figure 144 Control panel installation
2. Fasten to right front cover using the provided five M4 screws and M4 washers.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for installing the second OCP to the left front cover.
4. Connect emergency stop cables to Estop connector on left and right front covers.
5. Run M3337 will be connected to left and right OCP marked J1.
6.22.4 Install front covers

NOTICE
The front covers are heavy. Avoid awkward body positioning. Use proper
lifting techniques when handling covers.
Figure 145 Front cover components
1. Do not install washers when installing the four M10 x 25mm hex socket screws (2109867-13) that
fasten the two inside tabs of each front cover to the magnet.
2. Move Left Front Cover (5328961) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
3. Move Right Front Cover (5328960) to front of magnet and attach front cover to magnet using M10 x
4. Secure together left and right front covers at top and bottom of covers using M10 washers and M10
x 25mm screws.
5. Install LED display cover as instructed in the last two steps in 6.22.2 Install LED display on page 206.
7. Attach left and right Front Trim Rings (5177586 & 5177586-2).
8. The Laser Cover (5182894) will be installed, using the provided fasteners, after the dock is adjusted
and secured.
6.23 Dock installation

6.23.1 Removing bridge support shipping bracket
The yellow shipping bracket should have been removed from front of magnet prior to this. If still in place,
remove bracket.
Figure 146 Shipping bracket removal
6.23.2 Attach dock to magnet

1 1000-M10C020-33 M10 x 20 Socket Head 4

Screw
2000-M10-17 M10 Stainless Steel 4

Washers
1000-M10C025-33 M10 x 25 Socket Head 2

Cap Screws
5372304 M10 Flat Side Washers 2
3 * 11mm washers 1
8 2109878-4* M10 Flat Washer 1
Figure 147 Dock installation preparation
1. Make sure dock mounting bracket is securely attached to the magnet legs.
Install the Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly (5337932-2) to bridge lower support, using four
(4) M10 x 20 Socket Head Screws (1000-M10C020-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-
M10-17).
And attach the assembly to magnet feet with two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-
M10C025-33) and two (2) M10 Flat Side Washers (5372304).
Figure 148 Install Bridge Support Magnet Mount
NOTICE
Make sure that the bottom surface of the Dock Mounting Bracket, only
by the magnet feet, does not come in contact with the magnet room
floor (recommend a 2 mm minimum clearance).
2. If floor anchor stud was removed, reinstall in the floor.
3. Start with two (2) 11mm washers on each mounting stud, both sides, between dock and dock
support. If adjustment is required, add or remove washers until proper gap is achieved.
NOTE
Make sure that the left side cable mounting bracket is detached from cables before
routing the cables through the lower dock mounting bracket.
4. Cables will be routed through lower dock mounting bracket as dock is moved into place.
Figure 149 Install dock
5. Position dock in front of magnet and align Rubber Pad (2230001) under dock.
6. Move dock into position on studs and place the remaining washers equally on each of the four
mounting studs.
7. Fasten with provided nuts, one on each mounting stud.
8. Fasten Dock to floor anchor stud with pre-installed fastening hardware using the one (1) Dock
Clamp Plate (2178874) and one (1) M10 Flat Washer (2109878-4). Apply Loctite 242 as required.
NOTE
If adjustment is required for alignment of patient table, refer to calibration and setup
procedures on the Service Methods DVD until proper gap is achieved.
9. IMPORTANT
The height of the floor anchor stud must not exceed 2 inches (50mm) from the top of
the dock clamp plate to the top of the anchor stud. If the height is exceeded, inform
customer so that the responsible RF room vendor returns to the site to make the
appropriate alterations to meet the requirements contained in the applicable Pre-
installation manual.
On each side, adjust brackets as needed and tighten screws.
6.23.3 Dock cable connections - left side

NOTE
Care should be taken to not pinch cables between dock assembly and magnet dock
mounting brackets.
1 46-318508P20* M10 x 25 screws 2
2109878-4* M10 Flat Washer 2
2109875-4* M10 Hexagon Nut 2
Figure 150 Left side cables (system with RRX shown)
NOTE
Systems with DPP receivers have a different bracket than shown.
1. Attach cable mounting bracket on magnet leg using two (2) M10 x 25 screws (46-318508P20), M10
Flat Washers (2109878-4) and M10 Hexagon Nuts (2109875-4). Cables from dock are pre-
connected to bracket.
2. Insert and loop excess cable length through hole at front of magnet leg.
3. Make sure cables are routed behind cover mounting bracket. This is required to install front skirt
cover.
NOTE
Refer to applicable cable map for routing and connecting of cables to left side cable
mounting bracket and cables routed along the right side to the rear pedestal. For
Artist and Artist XT systems, the Dock does not have cabling to the rear pedestal.
Instead, dock cables are connected to the DPP receivers and Rx distribution module
according to the cable map.
4. From the SRI, route and connect Runs M3341 (for 32/32 systems only) to J1 (and J4 for GEM) and
Run M3370 to J2. Route and connect Run M3364 from J5 on the magnet I/O panel at top of magnet
to J3.
5. Dress and secure cables.
6.23.4 Dock cable routing - right side (systems with RRX

receivers)
Refer to applicable cable map for cable connections to the rear pedestal.
NOTE
For Artist and Artist XT systems, the dock does not have cabling to the rear pedestal.
NOTE
Care should be taken to not pinch cables between dock assembly and magnet dock
mounting brackets.
Figure 151 Right side cables
1. For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems, route cables from dock through bottom opening
of Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly as shown.
2. Continue routing cable under magnet towards the rear pedestal.
• The non-GEM cable connections are described in the following section.
• For the GEM Dock cables are routed and connected as marked to RFSB1 (slot 1) and RFSB2
(slot 2).
6.24 Route and connect cables in magnet room

6.24.1 Route cables in overhead cable routing mechanisms
Front, rear, left, and right, as used in this section, are defined as follows:
• The patient entrance end of the magnet is the front
• The opposite end is the rear
• Left and right are in respect to a person’s left and right while facing the patient entrance end of the
magnet
Refer to applicable magnet room cable map for location and routing of the remaining cables.
Figure 152 Routing of cables in overhead trays
2. Route cables from pen panel closet towards magnet. Excess cable length will be stored in pen panel
closet.
3. Refer to the following sections for connections and routing of cables around the magnet.
6.24.2 Cable separation at rear pedestal connection

For optimal performance of system, the I and Q cables (Runs M1322 and M1323) must be spaced a
minimum of 75 mm (3 inches) from cables exiting the cable tracks from the LPCA and 30mm (1.2 inches)
from the temperature Sensor cable routed from the gradient coil and cable to which it attaches, Run
M3344.
To maintain this separation, the cables are wrapped in foam insulation, pre-routed, and connected.
Figure 153 I and Q cable separation
1. Maintain the loop as installed. Do not alter routing.

2. Confirm no cables are looped on or against foam-insulated I & Q cables. Proper separation must be
maintained between these cables and any other cable.
3. Do not cut any cable ties.
6.24.3 Connect Runs to magnet I/O panel and MAG-DDSPLIT

Hex nuts are attached to the cable I/O panel which are used to mount routed cables to the panel.
Figure 154 Magnet I/O cable connections
1. Route and connect Runs M3031, M3302, M3303, M3312, and M3313 to I/O panel as marked.
2. If IRD is installed, route and connect Run M3314 to J2.
3. If IRD is installed, fiber optic Run P2026 will be secured at J11 and connected to J28 at Fiber Optic
I/O Panel.
NOTE
Locate Run P2026 on position 3.
4. Route Run M1310 from PEN Panel J72 and connect to J9 on MAG-DDSPLIT module.
6.24.4 Route and connect cables to MAG-TDM (MR450w,

MR450w GEM, Artist T)
Figure 155 TDM module cable connections
1. If Run M3368, TDM to receiver 2, is installed, make sure it is routed under the three cables
connected in the next step.
2. Refer to applicable cable map to route and connect the following Runs on the side of the magnet to
MAG-TDM: M1302 and either:
• (For SRPS only) Runs M3300 and M3301
• (For eSRPS only) Runs M3376 and M3377
3. Make sure cables are not pinched or subject to damage by sharp edges.
4. Route and connect Run M1315 to antenna in rear pedestal.
6.24.5 Route and connect cables to receivers (MR450w, MR450w

GEM, Artist T)
Figure 156 RRX cable connections
1. Connect Runs M3320 and M3321 to RRX #1. Route other ends to rear pedestal PED-HUB.
2. Route Run M2300 to rear pedestal PED-HUB.
3. If system being installed is a 32 channel, connect Runs M3322 and M3323 to RRX#2. Route other
ends to rear pedestal PED-HUB.
6.24.6 Route and connect cables to Rx distribution module

(Artist and Artist XT)
Figure 157 Rx distribution module
1. Route and connect Runs M1366, M1367, M1368, M1369, M1369, M3367, M3368 and M3470
between the Rx distribution and the DPP receivers as marked. Use the cable management rings and
tie wraps to secure cables together along the side of the magnet.
2. Route and connect Runs M1302, M1303, M1304, M3316, M3375 and M3391 between the Rx
distribution module and the PEN wall as marked.
3. Route and connect Run M1315 from Rx Dist-J11 to rear pedestal TNS antenna.
4. Connect fiber optic Run P2006 to Rx Dist-J16. This cable is routed to fiber optic I/O J23 on the top of
the magnet and through the fiber optic waveguide on the PEN wall.
Figure 158 Magnet fiber optic I/O
5. Route and connect Run M1335 from Rx Dist-J13 to MAG-AMP-J11.

6. Connect the M3355 Table Interface Cable (P/N 5759270) to Rx Dist-J57.
7. Route and connect the Dock P2 cable harness to the table interface cable as marked.
8. Route and connect M3355 from rear pedestal table interface J6 to the table interface cable as
marked.
Figure 159 M3355 Table Interface Cable (5759270)
1 Rx Distribution J57
2 PED-TIF J6
3 MAG-Table HART ID (DPP2-J1/J2/J3 and Dock P2)
9. Route and connect the M3380 cable harness from Rx Dist-J58 to MAG-BORE-J9, MAG-AMP-J9, and
MAG-DTRSW-J20.
6.24.7 Route and connect cables to DPP receivers (Artist and

Artist XT Only)
Figure 160 DPP receivers
Figure 161 DPP cable connections
1. Connect fiber optic Run P2004 to DPP1–J6, DPP1–J9, and DPP2–J6. This cable is routed to fiber
optic I/O J21 on the top of the magnet and through the waveguide on the PEN wall.
2. Connect fiber optic Run P2005 to DPP2–J9, DPP3–J6, and DPP3–J9. This cable is routed to fiber
optic I/O J22 on top of the magnet and through the waveguide on the PEN wall.
3. Connect fiber optic Run P2006 to DPP4–J6 and DPP4–J9.
4. From the rear pedestal, route and connect the cable marked for DPP1–J1/J2/J3. Other ends connect
to rear pedestal I/O J1, LPCA P1, and Load B in the rear pedestal.
5. From the dock P2 cable harness, route and connect the cable marked for DPP2–J1/J2/J3.
8. Route M3392 from PEN wall J57 to the BNC connectors on the MEMS cable management panel on
the magnet. Connect M3392 to the blue BNC cables from dock cable bundles P3 and P4, and from
LPCA P1. Only three connections are used on this system.
Figure 162 MEMS cable management panel (for cable Run M3392)
6.24.8 Route and connect cables to MAG-HYB and MAG-DDSPLIT

Figure 163 MAG-HYB and MAG-DDSPLIT connections
1. Route and connect Run M1335 from OUT on pre-amp to either:

• (For MR450w systems)
• Slot 1 B1 on rear pedestal PED-HUB (for 16/0 or 32/0 systems)
• J7 on rear pedestal PED-RBOX (for 32/32 systems)
• (For MR450w GEM and Artist T systems) slot 1, RFSB2 - body

• (For Artist and Artist XT systems) RX DIST-J13.
2. Run M1312 was routed from PEN Panel J74. Connect to J6 on MAG-HYB.
3. Route Run M1001 from J106 on SPW and connect to J1 on MAG-HYB. Secure cable to rear magnet
surface with provided cable ties.
6.24.9 Route and connect cables to rear pedestal

NOTE
A minimum 18 inch (458 mm) service loop must be provided between the magnet and the
rear pedestal. This is required for service of the magnet.
Figure 164 Routing of cables at rear of magnet
NOTE
Artist and XT systems do not include an RF Hub in the rear pedestal. Connections to the
RF Hub are only made on MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems.
1. (For SRPS only) Install Shunt Connector (5183786) to Slot 12 J3 before connecting any cables to
rear pedestal.
2. On the right side (as viewed from front of magnet) of rear flange route the following Runs. Tie-wrap
cables to pre-installed tie-wrap mounts located along outer edge of rear flange surface. Refer to
cable map for connection designations in rear pedestal.
• (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems) M1001, M1303, M1304, M1305,
M1306, M3311, M3315, and M3316.
• (For Artist and XT systems) M1305, M3311, and M3315. Also secure M1001 to the rear
flange with tie-wraps.
3. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T systems) Route on left side (as viewed from front of
magnet) of rear flange the following Runs: M2025 and either:
• (For SRPS only) M3304, M3306, M3308, and M3310
• (For eSRPS only) M3375
4. Tie-wrap cables together as shown. Attach to pre-installed tie-wrap mounts located along outer
edge of rear flange surface.
NOTICE
Trim cable tie-wraps to prevent accidental cuts.

5. Make sure cables are routed between trim skirt mounting bracket and magnet.
Figure 165 Rear pedestal left side cable connections (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T)
6. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) Refer to cable map to route and connect the following
cables to Slots 11 and 12 and either:
• (For SRPS only) M3304, M3306, M3308, and M3310,
• (For eSRPS only) M3375
and (For MR450w GEM and Artist T) Run 3354 connects to J8 on Slot 11
Secure cables with cable clamps on side of rear pedestal leg.
7. Route and connect Run M1315 to antenna.
8. If system being installed is a 32/32 channel, Route and connect Runs M3373 and M3354 to J9 and
J10 on PED-RBOX.
9. IMPORTANT! For 450w, 450w GEM, and Artist T, make sure that the 8w8 Port A cable is dressed
and routed between rear pedestal and magnet as shown. Do not route next to TDM antenna or in
close proximity to Run M1315 cable.
Figure 166 Rear pedestal right side cable connections (MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T
shown)
10. (For MR450w only) If system being installed is a 32/32 channel, route and connect Runs M1330,
M1331, M1332, M1333, and M1335 to PED-RBOX as marked.
NOTE
If system being installed is a 32/0 or a 16/0, Run M1335 is connected Slot 1 B1 on
PEN-HUB.
11. Connect one end as marked of Run M3344 to gradient temperature cable. Connectors must be
covered with Velcro wrap. Insure adequate spacing from Runs M1322 and M1323 as described
previously in 6.24.2 Cable separation at rear pedestal connection on page 216.
12. Route and connect RF cable Run M1305 to J1 on PED-I/O bracket. For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and
Artist T, also route and connect Run M1306 to J2 on PED-I/O bracket.
13. (For 450w, 450w GEM, Artist T) Route and connect Runs M3320 and M3321 to J101 and J102 on
PED-HUB.
14. (For 450w, 450w GEM, Artist T) If system being installed is a 32/32 channel, route and connect
Runs M3322 and M3323 to J103 and J104 on PEN-HUB.
6.24.10 Route and connect Run M3354 (MR450w, MR450w GEM,

Artist T only)
Figure 167 Installing Run M1354 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T only)
1. Connect to J9 located on RF Bias cable at front of magnet.

2. Route cable to rear pedestal and connect to Slot 11 J8 on PEN-HUB.
3. If 32/32-channel system is installed, connect remaining connector to J10 on PED-RBOX.
6.25 Install fiber optic cables

Figure 168 on page 230 shows the different PGR cabinets that may be delivered to your site, depending
on your system.
Figure 168 PGR cabinets
• For the older style of cabinet which contains the XGD gradient amplifiers and the cronus module,
complete procedures in Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XGD on page 232,
then proceed to Magnet room fiber optic installation on page 247 for completion of fiber optic cable
installation in the magnet room.
• For the newer style of cabinet which contains the XG2 gradient amplifiers without the cronus
module, complete procedures in Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with XG2 on
page 240, then proceed to Magnet room fiber optic installation on page 247 for completion of fiber
optic cable installation in the magnet room.
Refer to Cable Locations in Equipment Room Overhead Cable Trays for location of cables routed in
equipment room and Cable Locations in Magnet Room Overhead Cable Trays for location of cables in
magnet room in the overhead cable trays. Make sure cables are in their designated areas of the trays.
WARNING
LASER RADIATION HAZARD
Invisible laser radiation can be emitted from disconnected fiber-optic
cables or connectors.
Do not stare into the beam, point the cable or connector ends at your eyes,
or view through optical instruments.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL COMPONENT DAMAGE
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause permanent damage to electronic
components.
Observe the following ESD precautions:
• Work on a static-free mat.
• Wear a static strap to ensure that any accumulated electrostatic
charge is discharged from your body to the ground.
• Create a common ground for the equipment being worked on by
connecting the static-free mat, static strap, and peripheral units to
that piece of equipment.
NOTICE
POTENTIAL COMPONENT DAMAGE
The SFP optical transceiver is very sensitive to ESD. SFP latent failures can
occur, in dry climates or low relative humidity, surpassing their ESD
protection.
Contaminant failures can occur in SFP optics and exposed glass Rx and Tx
cable ends. Do not touch the exposed ends on fiber connectors. Leave the
dust caps in place until you are ready to install the SFP module. Use the
Fiber Optics Cleaning Kit to clean both the SFP and cable end every time
they are replaced or swapped from one port to another, or when using a
loopback. When working with the SFP optical transceiver:
• Always use ESD protection when handling the SFP optical transceiver
to prevent early failure.
• Always keep a protective cap on unplugged fiber connections.
• The SFP must be shipped in antistatic packaging. Discard any SFP
shipped or stored without proper ESD protection.
For more information on handling and cleaning the SFP transceiver refer to
Fiber Optic Cable Devices Installation and Replacement.
NOTICE
Fiber optic cables are easily damaged. Poorly routed cables cause
intermittent system problems. Handle and route fiber optic cables very
carefully. Do not bend cables to radius smaller than 7 inches (178 mm) or 14
inches in diameter (356 mm).
6.25.1 Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with

XGD
Figure 169 Fiber optic cable map (MR450w and MR450w GEM System with XGD)
6.25.1.1 Routing cables from magnet room

1. Route M2025 in overhead tray from top of magnet, through fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel to
Pen cabinet.
2. Route P2003 from J20 and P2004 (32 channel only) from J21 on fiber optic I/O panel on top of
magnet, through fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to PGR
cabinet.
3. Route P2026 (if IRD is installed) from J28 on fiber optic I/O panel on top of magnet, thru fiber optic
waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to OW.
4. Route E2002, E2020, and E2023 from top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet.
6.25.1.2 Route and connect fiber optic cables to PGR cabinet
Figure 170 Top of PGR cabinet
1. Starting at the Pen cabinet, route fiber optic Runs P2003, P2004, E2002, E2020, and E2023 through
overhead cable trays to top of PGR cabinet.
2. Connect cables as marked to fiber optic connection panel at top of PGR cabinet.
3. Route fiber optic wires through opening as shown.
4. Secure in place with clamps.
Figure 171 Fiber optic connectors
5. Route fiber optic wires in PGR cabinet behind guides.

6. These fiber optic connections are installed by pressing on each side of connector, not the boot,
while inserting.
Figure 172 Connect fiber optics at front of cabinet
7. For connections that do not provide space for fingers on the side, place a flat blade screwdriver
between wire covers and insert using a small amount of force.
NOTE
Use caution as applying excessive force can sever glass fibres protruding from
connect ends.
Refer to fiber optic cable map at front of this section for remainder of steps.
8. Connect to GMC J7 as marked.
9. (For systems with CAM) Connections to ICN are at the back of the ICN module. Pull module
forward and connect applicable single fiber optic to J5 on each VRF card (two cards for 32 channel).
10. Connect double fiber optic cable to J1 on the back of ICN for each VRF card.
11. Connect applicable marked fiber optics to J8, J11, J13, and J14 to CAM slot 7F at front of CAM
module.
12. Connection for CAM slot 10R is at back of CAM module. Pull module forward and connect to J18/
J19.
6.25.1.3 Route and connect fiber optic cables in Pen cabinet

Route and connect fiber optic cables as shown below.
Figure 173 Top of Pen cabinet
1. Runs P2003, P2004, and P2026 routed through opening at top of cabinet.
2. Connect E2002, E2020, and E2023 to top of Pen cabinet as marked.
Figure 174 Secure fiber optic wires inside Pen cabinet
3. Route and secure with tie-wraps Run M2025 to side of cabinet.

4. Route and secure with tie-wraps Runs E2002, E2020, and 2023 to side of cabinet.
Figure 175 Connect fiber optic wires in Pen cabinet
5. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the CFB module.

6. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the Exciter module.
7. J37/J38 is located on the back of the PHPS module. Refer to next steps for access and connection
of wire.
8. On magnet room side of Pen panel, unfasten the 16 fasteners attaching the access plate to the Pen
panel.
NOTE
Cables are attached on the interior side of the access plate.
9. Remove access plate enough to reach in and connect M2025 wire to J37/J38.
10. Reattach access plate to Pen panel.
6.25.1.4 Route and connect fiber optic cable in operator workspace

NOTE
This cable is installed only if system has In-Room Display (IRD) as part of installation.
Figure 176 Cable connection in OW cabinet
1. Route and attach fiber optic connector to bracket at rear of GOC cabinet.
2. Route and connect P2026 wire to J3 on IRD module.
6.25.2 Equipment room fiber optic installation for systems with

XG2
Figure 177 Fiber optic cable map (system with XG2 and CAM)
Figure 178 Fiber optic cable map (Artist T)
Figure 179 Fiber optic cable map (Artist and Artist XT)
6.25.2.1 Routing cables from magnet room

1. Route M2025 in overhead tray from top of magnet, through fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel to
Pen cabinet.
2. Route P2003 to Fiber Optic I/O panel J20 (MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist T) or J21 (Artist/XT). on
top of the magnet. Route through the fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen
cabinet to PGR cabinet.
3. Route P2004 to Fiber Optic I/O panel J21 (MR450w and MR450w GEM with 32 channels only) or J22
(Artist/XT) on top of the magnet. Route through the fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20
at top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet. Artist T systems do not have P2004.
4. (For Artist and Artist XT) Route P2006 to Fiber Optic I/O panel J23 on top of the magnet. Route
through the fiber optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet.
5. Route P2026 (if IRD is installed) from J28 on Fiber Optic I/O panel on top of magnet, through fiber
optic waveguide in Pen panel, through J20 at top of Pen cabinet to OW.
6. Route E2020 (MR450w, MR450w GEM) or P2020 (Artist/T/XT) from top of Pen cabinet to PGR
cabinet.
7. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM) Route E2023 from top of Pen cabinet to PGR cabinet.
6.25.2.2 Route and connect fiber optic cables to PGR cabinet
Figure 180 Top of PGR cabinet
1. Starting at the Pen cabinet, route fiber optic Runs P2003, P2004, P2006, E2020 or P2020, and
E2023 (as applicable to the system) through overhead cable trays to top of PGR cabinet.
2. Connect cables as marked to fiber optic connection panel at top of PGR cabinet.
3. Route fiber optic wires through opening as shown.
4. Secure in place with clamps.
Figure 181 Fiber optic connectors
5. Route fiber optic wires in PGR cabinet behind guides.

6. These fiber optic connections are installed by pressing on each side of connector, not the boot,
while inserting.
Figure 182 Connect fiber optics at front of cabinet
7. For connections that do not provide space for fingers on the side, place a flat blade screwdriver
between wire covers and insert using a small amount of force.
NOTE
Use caution as applying excessive force can sever glass fibres protruding from
connect ends.
Refer to fiber optic cable map at front of this section for remainder of steps.
8. (For systems with CAM) Connections to ICN are at the back of the ICN module. Pull module
forward and connect applicable single fiber optic to J5 on each VRF card (two cards for 32 channel).
9. (For systems with CAM) Connect double fiber optic cable to J1 on the back of ICN for each VRF
card.
10. (For systems with CAM) Connect remaining fiber optics to J8, J11, J13, and J14 in CAM Slot 7F at
front of CAM module.
11. (For systems with CAM) Connect double fiber optic cable to J10/J11 in CAM Slot 10F at front of
module.
12. (For systems with ICE) Connect P2003 fiber optic cable ends to ICE J1/J2/J5 as marked.
6.25.2.3 Route and connect fiber optic cables in Pen cabinet

Route and connect fiber optic cables as shown below.
Figure 183 Top of Pen cabinet
1. Runs P2003, P2004, and P2026 (as applicable to the system) routed thru opening at top of cabinet.
2. Connect E2020 and E2023 to top of Pen cabinet as marked.
Figure 184 Secure fiber optic wires inside Pen cabinet
3. Route and secure with tie-wraps Run M2025 to side of cabinet.

4. Route and secure with tie-wraps Runs E2020 and E2023 to side of cabinet.
Figure 185 Connect fiber optic wires in Pen cabinet
5. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the CFB module.

6. Connect fiber optic wires as marked to the Exciter module.
7. J37/J38 is located on the back of the PHPS module. Refer to next steps for access and connection
of wire.
8. On magnet room side of Pen panel, unfasten the 16 fasteners attaching the access plate to the Pen
panel.
NOTE
Cables are attached on the interior side of the access plate.
9. Remove access plate enough to reach in and connect M2025 wire to J37/J38.
10. Reattach access plate to Pen panel.
6.25.2.4 Route and connect fiber optic cable in operator workspace

NOTE
This cable is installed only if system has In-Room Display (IRD) as part of installation.
Figure 186 Cable connection in OW cabinet
1. Route and attach fiber optic connector to bracket at rear of GOC cabinet.
2. Route and connect P2026 wire to J3 on IRD module.
6.25.3 Magnet room fiber optic installation

Figure 187 Top of magnet fiber optic cables
1. Route and attach Run P2003 fiber optic connector to J20 on Fiber Optic I/O bracket on magnet.
2. Route and attach Run P2004 fiber optic connector to J21 (as applicable to the system) on Fiber
Optic I/O bracket.
3. If IRD is installed, route and connect Run P2026 to fiber optic connector at J28 on I/O bracket. Run
P2026 should already been routed through J11 on magnet I/O bracket.
Figure 188 Connect fiber optics to PAC and rear pedestal
NOTICE
Fiber optic cables are easily damaged. Poorly routed cables cause
intermittent system problems. Handle and route fiber optic cables very
carefully. Do not bend cables to radius smaller than 7 Inches (178 mm)
or 14 inches in diameter (356 mm).
4. Route M2025 at rear of magnet along side of cables routed on left side of rear magnet flange (as
viewed from front of magnet) to rear pedestal. Make sure conduit is routed behind skirt cover
bracket. For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T only, connect fiber optic cable M2025-D to PED
HUB SLOT 11 - J14/J15 as marked. For other systems (Artist and Artist XT), leave fiber optic cable
M2025-D unconnected and secured on the system.
NOTE
Secure in place with tie-wraps after all system cables have been connected and
adjusted for cable service loop to rear pedestal.
5. IMPORTANT! Do not route any cables on magnet in area indicated by diagonal shading. The service
ladder side shield needs this area clear when it is used for servicing the magnet.
6. Route and connect wire M2025-C to J1 on PAC.
7. Route P2003 fiber optic wires over top of magnet and connect to appropriate receivers as marked.
• RCVR #1 J4/J5 (MR450w, MR450w GEM)
• RCVR #1 J4 and RCVR #2 J4 (Artist T)
• DPP1–J6/J9 and DPP2–J6 (Artist and XT)
8. (For MR450w/MR450w GEM with 32 channels, Artist, and Artist XT) Route P2004 over top of
magnet and connect to appropriate receivers as marked.
• RCVR #2 J4/J5 (MR450w and MR450w GEM with 32 channels)
• DPP2–J9 and DPP3–J6/J9 (Artist and XT)
9. Route and connect wires M2025-A and M2025-B marked J11/J12 and J13/J14 to SRI.
10. (For Artist and XT) Route P2006 over top of magnet and connect to DPP4–J6/J9 and Rx Distribution-
J16 as marked.
11. Coil and tie-wrap excess fiber optic cable so that the bend radius is not smaller than 7 inches (178
mm) or 14 inches in diameter (365 mm). Too small of a bend radius will damage wires. Excess fiber
optics can be tie-wrapped as shown or coiled and stored on floor under magnet. Refer to Cable
Specification table in Chapter 8, Appendix for minimum bend radius of each cable wire.
6.26 Pneumatic patient alert installation

The customer and users should be involved in the following decisions:
• Routing of Pneumatic Tubing
• Location of Control Box
NOTICE
Do not substitute other types of tubing for the pneumatic tubing supplied
with this Installation Kit. Substitution of other types of tubing may cause a
control box malfunction.
6.26.1 Magnet room routing of pneumatic tubing

NOTICE
Make sure that pneumatic tubing is not routed where it can be stepped on,
pinched, or have an object set on it. The control box alarm will not work if
pneumatic tubing is pinched. Also, make sure that the pneumatic tubing
can be routed from the PAC connector through the overhead cable tray, and
to the Penetration Panel without being pinched along the route by other
cables.
Figure 189 Routing of pneumatic tube
1. Push end of pneumatic tubing onto PAC tubing connector located on left side of magnet.
2. Route tubing along path of fiber optic wires and secure in place with tie wraps.Do not over-tighten
tie-wraps. Tubing must not be deformed or kinked.
NOTE
If the pneumatic tubing is to be pulled through fiber-optic conduit, coat with baby
powder, not grease, to allow easier pulling.
3. Route pneumatic tubing from PAC, through the overhead cable tray to waveguide on penetration
panel.
4. Route end of pneumatic tubing from magnet room side of penetration panel through wave guide,
through the fiber optic opening at the top of the Pen cabinet to where the control box will be
installed.
5. Refer to Determining need of extender box on page 251 to determine if extender box is required. If
extender box is not required, route pneumatic tubing through overhead cable tray in equipment
room to control box location.
6.26.2 Determining need of extender box

If installation requires greater than 115 feet of pneumatic tubing between the squeeze bulb (hanging on
Magnet Enclosure) and control box (near Operator’s Console), Extender Kit, 46-317758P2, must be
ordered.
• If the pneumatic tubing is long enough to reach control box: The extender is not needed,
proceed to Control box installation on wall or under shelf on page 253, Control Box Installation.
• If the pneumatic tubing is not long enough to reach control box: The extender is needed,
proceed to Installation of Extender Kit 46-317758P2 (if required) on page 251, Installation of
Extender Kit.
6.26.3 Installation of Extender Kit 46-317758P2 (if required)

DANGER
Extender box contains ferrous parts and will be strongly attracted to the
magnet and become a dangerous projectile.
Do not mount extender box in magnet room.
6.26.3.1 Install extender box
Figure 190 Component installation
1. Choose the mounting location for extender box on equipment room wall next to penetration panel.
Extender box will be mounted with pneumatic and electrical jacks on side of extender box.
2. Cut a two inch long piece of Velcro loops and a two inch long piece of Velcro hooks. Both are
obtained from the Pneumatic Patient Alert Kit.
3. Clean the back of extender box, remove protective paper from back of Velcro loops, and attach
Velcro to center of extender box back.
4. Clean wall in the area where extender box will be mounted, remove protective paper from back of
Velcro hooks, and attach Velcro to wall in same orientation as Velcro loops on extender box.
5. Push end of pneumatic tubing fully onto feed-thru connector on extender box.
6. Push the jack on one end of the 65 foot extender wire into the plug on side of extender box.
6.26.3.2 Connection of extender wire to control box
Figure 191 Extender wire connection
1. Route the extender wire from extender box to control box. Control box will be installed near
operator console, within five feet of an electrical outlet.
2. Push the jack at other end of extender wire into the plug on back of control box.
6.26.4 Control box installation options

Consult with the operator in choosing the mounting orientation for the control box. Some key factors to
consider are ease of use by operator, remaining within sight of operator, and remaining within five feet
of an electrical outlet. Choose one of the following control box locations:
• Mount control box on a wall or other vertical surface per procedures in Control box installation on
wall or under shelf on page 253, Control Box Installation on Wall or Under Shelf.
• Mount control box under shelf per procedures in Control box installation on wall or under shelf on
page 253, Control Box Installation on Wall or Under Shelf.
• Place Control Box on a counter top, desk top, or other horizontal surface. Set the control box near
operator console and within five feet of electrical outlet. Control box should be placed within sight
of operator. Proceed to Final connections to control box on page 257, Final Connections to
Control Box.
NOTE
The installer must provide additional mounting hardware if supplied screws or adhesive
backed Velcro are not adequate for installation of the control box.
6.26.5 Control box installation on wall or under shelf

1. Clean control box surface.
2. Remove adhesive backing from metal nameplate and apply over silk screened lettering as shown.
Figure 192 Apply nameplate
3. Select one of the following for installation of control box:
• If control box will be mounted to wall or shelf with Velcro, go to Control box mounted with Velcro on
page 254.
• If control box will be mounted to wall with screws, go to Installing control box with mounting
screws on vertical surface on page 255.
• If control box will be mounted to shelf with screws, go to Installing control box with mounting
screws under shelf on page 256.
6.26.6 Control box mounted with Velcro

Figure 193 Apply Velcro
1. Clean the bottom surface of the control box.

2. From the Pneumatic Patient Alert Kit, cut a three inch long piece of Velcro loops and a three inch
piece of Velcro hooks.
3. Remove protective paper from back of Velcro loops, and attach Velcro to center bottom of control
box.
4. Choose the mounting location for control box on wall (or under shelf) next to operator console.
Control box should be mounted within sight of operator.
5. Clean the area where control box will be mounted.
6. Remove protective paper from back of Velcro hooks and attach to mounting location in same
orientation as Velcro on box.
7. Mount the control box by pressing Velcro on control box against Velcro on mounting location and
twisting slightly.
8. Proceed to Final connections to control box on page 257, Final Connections to Control Box.
6.26.7 Installing control box with mounting screws on vertical

surface
Choose the mounting area near the operator console and install mounting screws (item 9). Control box
should be mounted within sight of operator.
NOTICE
If mounting on the wall, confirm with the site that no unforeseen hazards
exist beneath the surface.
Figure 194 Vertical surface installation
1. Determine which of the shown keyhole slot spacings are applicable to control box and select
appropriate dimensions to use.
2. Mark top mounting hole position on wall.
3. Mark bottom mounting hole position on wall.
4. Drill a 1/16 in. pilot hole at locations if furnished screws are used.
5. Install screws to depth as shown.
6. Center box keyhole slots over screws, push in on box, and then push downward to seat screws
within slots.
7. Tighten or loosen screws as necessary to obtain a snug fit of box against wall.
6.26.8 Installing control box with mounting screws under shelf

Choose the mounting area near the operator console and install mounting screws (item 9). Control box
should be mounted within sight of operator.
Figure 195 Under shelf installation
1. Determine which of the shown keyhole slot spacings are applicable to control box and select
appropriate dimensions to use.
2. Mark front mounting hole position on underside of shelf.
3. Mark rear mounting hole position on underside of shelf.
4. Drill a 1/16 in. pilot hole at locations if furnished screws are used.
5. Install screws to depth as shown.
6. Center box keyhole slots over screws, push in on box, and then push inward to seat screws within
slots
7. Tighten or loosen screws as necessary to obtain a snug fit of box against wall.
6.26.9 Final connections to control box

Figure 196 Control box connections
1. Bring the pneumatic tubing to back of control box and mark length. Leave two inches of extra
pneumatic tubing for connection.
2. Cut tubing and push fully onto feed-thru connector on back of control box.
3. Plug power supply jack into control box.
4. Set power supply to outlet voltage (115VAC or 230VAC).
5. Plug power supply into AC outlet.
6. Check that green LED is lighted.
6.26.10 Squeeze bulb installation

The following steps should be completed after the side covers have been installed.
Figure 197 Tube connection to PAC module
1. Insert end of pneumatic tubing into squeeze bulb approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm). For ease of
pneumatic tubing insertion, pinch pneumatic tubing in one hand while squeezing squeeze bulb and
pushing pneumatic tubing in with the other hand. This will create a positive pressure and expand
squeeze bulb opening.
2. Before cutting pneumatic tubing from roll to length required, verify that when the squeeze bulb is
held by a patient being scanned, the tubing length can be routed to the Call connector on the PAC
Interface without getting in the way of operator or patient during use.
3. Connect end of tubing to Call connection on PAC interface.
6.27 Bridge and rear pedestal installation

WARNING
If the magnet is energized, ferrous material will be strongly attracted to the
magnet and may become dangerous projectiles.
The wheel assemblies attached to the Rear Pedestal for shipping and
delivery MUST be removed before moving Rear Pedestal into Magnet Room.
6.27.1 Bridge front support for HM Magnet

The Bridge front support is an assembly of three brackets:
Figure 198 Bridge front support brackets
1. Bridge Support Upper Assembly (5335143-2)

2. Bridge Support Lower Assembly (5334546)
3. Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly (5337932-2).
NOTICE
Make sure that after all final adjustments have been made and all fasteners
tightened that no part of the bridge support assembly is in contact with the
magnet surface.
6.27.2 Bridge front support for IPM magnet

2 1206-M10C020-33* M10 screws 1
2001-M10-17* M10 Stainless Steel 1

Washers
1000-M10C025-33* M10 x 25 Socket Head 1

Cap Screws
5372304* M10 Flat Side Washer 1
1. Remove shipping bracket

2. Fix Bridge Support Magnet Mount Assembly (5337932-3) to item 2 using M10 screws (1206-
M10C020-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2001-M10-17). Fix Bridge Support Magnet Mount
Assembly (5337932-3) to magnet feet, using, M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-
M10C025-33) and M10 Flat Side Washers (5372304).
Figure 199 Shipping bracket removal
6.27.3 Z-direction bridge alignment

Align the bridge in the Z-direction (in/out of the magnet bore) until front surface of bridge aligns with
front surface of end bell to within +/- 3mm.
Figure 200 Z-direction alignment
1. Alignment to front end bell is done by pushing or pulling bridge with support upper attached which
allows the L-Brackets to slide toward or away from the magnet.
2. When aligned, tighten the four M10 screws attaching L-bracket to the support lower.
NOTE
If more adjustment is needed for the Z-axis adjustment, loosen the four bolts (two on
each side) holding the support lower to the bridge support magnet mount assembly.
3. Move the support lower until the +/-3mm bridge-to-end bell alignment has been achieved.
4. Re-tighten bolts.
6.27.4 Attach rear pedestal to magnet

CAUTION
POTENTIAL INJURY HAZARD
Weight of rear pedestal
Rear pedestal requires at least THREE people to move rear pedestal into
position at rear of magnet.
2 3002-M10C-33* M10 SS nut 4

Washers
3 1000-M10C025-33 M10 x 25 Socket Head 4

Cap Screws

Washers
4 3002-M10C-33 M10 SS nut 2

Washer
6 3002-M10C-33* M10 SS nut 4

Washers
7 3002-M10C-33 M10 SS nut 4

Washers
Figure 201 Attaching front and rear split bridge
1. Before attaching rear pedestal, perform a preliminary check on the Y-direction distance at the front
and rear of the bridge. Refer to 6.27.5 Y-direction bridge alignment (front of magnet) on page 264, Y-
Direction Bridge Alignment, for instructions on setting required distance between bridge and top
of the patient bore.
2. Remove four (4) M10 SS nuts (3002-M10C-33) and four (4) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-
M10-17) from studs on front split bridge.
3. Attach Magnet Bracket (5343250) to rear magnet mounting blocks using four (4) M10 x 25 Socket
Head Cap Screws (1000-M10C025-33) and two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17) on
each screw. Do not tighten as adjustment may be needed.
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please use Magnet Bracket (5822217)
4. Attach Rear Pedestal Bracket (5343248) to two studs on rear pedestal using two (2) M10 SS nuts
(3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17).
5. Move the rear pedestal closer to rear of magnet and adjust leveling feet to align top of rear split
bridge with top of front split bridge in magnet bore.
6. Move rear pedestal forward and engage four studs on front split bridge. Secure with the previously
removed M10 SS nut (3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washer (2000-M10-17). Remove
from bridge.
Figure 202 Installing lower bracket
7. (For For HM series magnet) Using four (4) M10 SS nuts (3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel
Washers (2000-M10-17), connect 5343250 and 5343248 with Mounting Bracket plate (5343249).
Do not tighten until bridge and table are completely adjusted.
(For For IPM magnet) Using four (4) M10 SS nuts (3002-M10C-33) and M10 Stainless Steel
Washers (2000-M10-17), connect 5822217 and 5343248 with Mounting Bracket plate (5429470).
Do not tighten until bridge and table are completely adjusted.
NOTE
Cables are routed below the bracket. Air hose is routed on top of bracket as shown in
following illustration.
6.27.5 Y-direction bridge alignment (front of magnet)

Figure 203 Maintain spacing from floor
1. IMPORTANT
Make sure that the lower bridge support magnet mount assembly surface, only by
the magnet feet, does not come in contact with the magnet room floor (recommend a
2 mm minimum clearance).
Figure 204 Y-direction alignment
2. Align the bridge in the Y-direction (up/down in the magnet bore) to within 582 mm - 585 mm using
the bridge height gauge (delivered to site packaged with Dock assembly) at the front of the magnet.
3. Make sure the distance measured is between the top of the RF body coil and the bridge surface
under the belt.
4. Adjust the M10 Nylon nuts at the bottom of the bridge support upper bracket to raise and lower
bridge to attain the 582 mm - 585 mm distance in between the top surface of the RF body coil and
the surface under the belt on the bridge.
5. A level can be used to make sure bridge is level in the X-direction. Adjust M10 nylon nuts as
necessary.
6. Tighten the two (2) M10 bolts and the M10 nylon hex nuts on each side.
6.27.6 Rear split bridge height adjustment (rear of magnet)

Refer to Y-Direction Bridge Alignment for distance between bridge and top of the RF Coil.
NOTE
The bridge does not need to be “level” to Earth in the Z-direction in achieving the
alignment of bridge surfaces. Therefore, you do NOT need a level at this point of the
installation, you DO NEED a straight edge. (Though you can use a level as a straight edge)
Figure 205 Rear bridge height adjustment
1. Use a straight edge to make sure that the front and rear bridge surfaces, on both sides of bridge
where the LPCA wheels roll, are even. This will provide smooth travel for the Carriage wheels. If
uneven, refer to next step.
2. Align the bridge in the Y-direction (up/down in the magnet bore) to within 582 mm - 585 mm using
the bridge height gauge (delivered to site packaged with dock assembly) at the rear of the magnet.
3. Adjust the rear pedestal feet (by turning) to raise and lower bridge to attain the 582 mm - 585 mm
distance in between the top of the patient bore and the surface under the belt on the bridge.
4. At this point in adjusting the rear pedestal, use a level to make sure the Bridge on the rear pedestal
is level in the X-direction. Adjust rear pedestal feet as necessary.
6.27.7 Front and rear split bridge alignment adjustment

1 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 8

Screw
Figure 206 Bridge alignment adjustment
NOTE
Illustrations of the rear pedestal shows components which are not included in Artist and
Artist XT systems.
1. Install left and right rear pedestal bumpers using M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw (1000-M6C016-33)
fasteners, four (4) at the right side and four (4) at the left side .
NOTE
Gap between rear split bridge and left and right rear pedestal bumpers should be
uniform along entire length.
2. Adjustment for left and right rear pedestal bumpers is made by loosening four fasteners
underneath each bumper and moving bumper until uniform gap is made.
6.27.8 X-direction bridge alignment

2 1000-M10C025-33* M10 x 25 Socket Head 2

Cap Screws
5372304* M10 Flat Side Washers 2
Figure 207 X-direction alignment
1. Align the bridge in the X-direction (left/right in the magnet bore) by shifting entire front bridge
support assembly until the distance between bridge and RF body coil is equal on both sides of the
bridge. It may be necessary to loosen the two (2) M10 bolts that fasten the bridge support
assembly to the magnet feet.
IMPORTANT
Bridge must not be in contact with the RF body coil along its entire length.
2. Tighten the two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-M10C025-33) and two (2) large M10
Flat Side Washers (5372304) that fasten the bridge support assembly to the magnet feet, once
adjustment is complete.
3. Check to make sure the bridge support upper assembly is not in contact with the front end bell and
the support lower is not touching the magnet. This is to ensure that there is not vibration short
circuit.
4. Reattach front bridge cover.
6.27.9 Bridge height adjustment

Make sure the distance between the top of the patient bore and the surface under the belt on the bridge
is between 582 mm to 585 mm at both ends of the magnet. Adjust bridge as necessary to meet
distance.
• Tighten all fastener connections on bridge and rear pedestal after adjustment is complete.
• Make sure the fasteners for the lower bracket between magnet and rear pedestal are tightened.
6.28 LPCA installation

The steps in the following procedure apply to all systems, though the illustrations show a non-GEM
LPCA cover and carriage.
6.28.1 Route and attach drive belt

NOTICE
Use care and avoid pinch points when performing drive belt installation.
Figure 208 Drive belt installation
1. Unfasten four screws from top of LPCA and remove top cover.
2. Route one end of drive belt delivered with front split bridge, through opening in LPCA base plate
and attach with clamp. Make sure that 3 teeth are exposed after clamp is attached.
3. Under bridge, loosen the two socket head screws on idler tension block.
4. Lower the idler tension block with pulley to its lowest position by unscrewing hex head bolt.
5. Route other end of drive belt from front of bridge towards tension pulley.
6. Feed back end of belt underneath bridge, around tension pulley and rear pulleys into bridge.
NOTE
Check to verify that belt is not caught around spacers near rear pulley.
7. Route belt under and through opening to top of carriage.
8. Position belt under clamp plate. There should be 15 teeth exposed past the clamp. Secure in place.
9. Tension the belt by raising the idler tension block. Turn the hex head bolt until the two socket head
cap screws are at the bottom of the slot in the idler tension block.
10. Tighten the two socket head screws.
6.28.2 Install LPCA cover

Figure 209 LPCA cover installation
1. Check all connectors and make sure they are seated properly.
2. Unfasten plastic bag from surface of LPCA and remove spring inside.
3. Set spring on cradle latch stud.
4. Carefully replace LPCA cover and fasten with four screws previously removed.
6.29 SRI connections

Many of the cables connected to the SRI module have been completed prior to delivery of system to site.
Refer to applicable cable map for this site configuration and make sure that all cables, including those
routed during this installation, have been connected to the SRI.
Figure 210 SRI cable connections
1. Make sure Run M3342 is connected to J23.

2. Make sure Run M3345 is connected to J32.
3. Route Run M3346 from the cable track in the rear pedestal and connect to J31.
6.30 Emergency off connections

6.30.1 Overview
Two Emergency Off (E-off) pushbuttons are supplied with the system. One pushbutton is for installing in
the magnet room. The second pushbutton is optional and can be installed in the equipment or operator
room.
Refer to applicable site installation drawings for detailed wiring diagram.
6.30.2 Magnet room pushbutton installation

1. Connect Run M3030 to the SPW and route the cable to the remote E-off pushbutton location and
trim cable to length. Locate red and black pair and prepare ends for applicable terminals.
NOTE
Run M3030 has nine wires. Make sure to use the black and red pair when connecting
to the E-off pushbutton.
2. Connect Run E3030 to the Secondary Pen Wall (SPW) and route the cable to the Main Disconnect
Panel (MDP) and trim cable to length. Locate white and black pair of wires and prepare ends for
applicable terminals.
3. If the MDP power has been connected, have the proper personnel connect the E-off wiring. See
illustration below for reference.
Figure 211 Emergency off connections
6.31 Route and connect Secondary Pen Wall (SPW)

cables
The SPW was delivered to site and installed prior to magnet delivery.
• The gas lines, Runs 621 and 622, were routed thru the J110 and J111 waveguides when the magnet
was installed.
• The gradient cables were routed and connected to the gradient filter in a previous procedure in the
section.
• The coolant lines have been routed thru J100 and J101 waveguides.
• The 4 inch air hose from the PGR cabinet has been routed to J104 waveguide.
Refer to cable map and connect remaining cables to SPW after grounding and leakage test has been
completed.
Figure 212 SPW cable connections
1. (For MR450w, MR450w GEM, and Artist T) Route and connect Run M3309 to J123 on the
transmit switch.
2. Not used. There are no connections to J107 and J108 at this time.
3. Route and connect Runs M3022 and M3023 from MagMon to J116 and J117.
4. Route and connect Run M3030 from E-Off Switch to J115.
5. Route and connect Run E3031 from GOC to J118.
6. Remove safety cover. Route and connect Run 623 to F1 and F3. Replace safety cover.
6.32 Route and connect penetration panel cables

The site can have either of the following two types of Pen panels delivered to be installed: SRPS or
eSRPS. Follow the instructions for the applicable Pen panel installed at this site.
• Penetration panel with SRPS. Refer to 6.32.1 SRPS Pen panel cable connections on page 275
• Penetration panel with eSRPS. Refer to 6.32.2 eSRPS Pen panel cable connections on page 277
Figure 213 SRPS and eSRPS penetration panels
6.32.1 SRPS Pen panel cable connections

1. The blower box hoses and cables should have been installed and connected in previous procedures.
Figure 214 Pen panel for SRPS connections
2. Connect cables to TR/DD Filter: M1310 (J72) and M1312 (J74).

3. Connect cables to access panel:
• Top Row - M1302 (J29), M1304 (J30), M1303 (J32), M3316 (J34)
• Middle Row - M3310 (J45), M3306 (J46), M3308 (J47), M3304 (J48).
• Bottom Row - M3313 (J35), M3311 (J36), M3303 (J39), M3302 (J40), M3312 (J41), M3315 (J54),
M3314 (J42) (option)
4. Make sure the middle row cables are routed in the correct orientation, connected, and secured in
place with straps as shown.
5. Connect TDM power cables: M3300 (J51), M3301 (J52)
6.32.2 eSRPS Pen panel cable connections

Figure 215 Pen panel for eSRPS connections
1. The blower box hoses and cables should have been installed and connected in previous procedures.
2. Connect cables to TR/DD Filter: M1310 (J72) and M1312 (J74).
3. Connect cables to access panel:
• Top row - M1302 (J29), M1304 (J30) M1303 (J32) M3316 (J34 for MR450w/MR450w GEM/Artist
T, or J56 for Artist/Artist XT)
• Middle row - M3313 (J35) M3311 (J36) M3303 (J39) M3302 (J40) M3312 (J41) M3315 (J54)
M3314 (J42) (option)
• Bottom row - M3378 (J111, GEM and Artist/T/XT only), M3375 (J112)
• MEMS subpanel (Artist and XT) - M3391 (J55), M3316 (J56), M3392 (J57)
Software version DV29 and later introduces support for a non-MEMS system configuration.
Existing or upgraded systems will continue to use the MEMS power supply. Newly installed
systems may not have the MEMS power supply. Identify the presence or absence of MEMS on
your system by looking for the MEMS DC Power Supply Assembly (part number 6859128) in
the power supply rack of the ISC.
6.33 Installation of magnet enclosure rear covers for

MR450w
NOTICE
The rear covers are heavy. Avoid awkward body positioning. Use proper
lifting techniques when handling covers.
NOTE
The lower skirt cover is shown in the view below, but is not installed at this time.
Figure 216 Enclosure rear covers
1. Attach the left rear cover using the three M10 x 25mm hex head cap screws (2109867-23) and
three M10 nylon flat washers (46-294167P73) fasteners.
2. Install two M10 button head screws (2109872-12) and nylon flat washer (46-294167P73) at these
two locations.
3. Attach the right rear cover. Refer to steps 1 and 2.
4. Attach the rear cable cover (not shown) using the two screws and nylon washers provided in the
mounting holes.
6.34 Coil and dress cable in penetration panel closet

Inside the Pen panel closet, there are cable hooks for the purpose of storing excess cable lengths.
1. Separate, coil, and neatly dress any excess cable lengths and place them on available hooks.
2. Refer to Storage of Excess Cable Length for information on coiling cables.
Figure 217 Storage of excess cable lengths
Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w
Chapter 7 Final Enclosure Installation for

MR450w
7.1 Install Enclosure Covers

7.1.1 Install Skirt Covers
Install the left and right side lower Skirt Covers as shown in the following steps.
Figure 218 Installation of Skirt Cover
1. Position cover on magnet.

2. Attach using two socket head cap screws and washers.
3. Attach cover to popper.
NOTE
Rear skirt covers have one popper, front skirt covers have two poppers.
4. Repeat above steps for remaining three covers.
7.1.2 Install Side Covers

Figure 219 Installation of Side Covers
1. Install the Right Top Cover Assembly (5335653) and then the Right Side Cover Assembly (5328957).
2. Hold the handles away from the enclosure when installing the Left Top Cover Assembly (5335654).
3. Make sure that the alignment tabs are properly slotted under the right side's slot.
4. Make sure the tab is properly placed.
Figure 220 Installation of Left Side Cover
5. Hold the sides of the Lower Cover and align the round feet with the front and rear cover ovals.
Route the PPG cable attached to PAC through the opening in the side cover. Snap in place.
6. Coil and place PPG cable on hook.
7. If connection points and symbols are not aligned properly, proceed to next sections for adjustment
procedures.
7.1.3 Adjust Cover Fit

After installing the top and side covers, adjustment will most likely be required to adjust the gap spacing
between the top & side covers and the front & rear covers.
Figure 221 Check for Gaps
1. Observe and measure gaps at front and rear of enclosure between the covers. Only front view is
shown in illustration.
2. Remove top and side covers.
Figure 222 Adjustment Points
3. To adjust front and rear covers, turn the adjusting screws up or down to achieve proper height.
4. Install top and side covers again and check gap for uniformity.
5. Repeat above steps as necessary until uniform gap is achieved.
7.1.4 Adjust PAC Interface Panel

The PAC Interface panel can be adjusted in three directions. The five ports on the Interface Panel should
be centered in the opening of the cover. It is suggested that the top cover be removed during this
process. This will make the adjustments easier.
Figure 223 Adjustment Locations
1. In/out direction
2. Side to side direction
3. Up/down direction
Figure 224 Check Fit of Interface Panel
4. Remove top cover and reinstall side cover.

5. Check Interface panel for alignment gaps and center location in cover opening.
6. Remove side cover and adjust Interface Panel as necessary.
7. Repeat adjustment process until Interface Panel is centered and there are no gaps between side
cover and Interface Panel.
8. Install top cover (not shown) and side cover.
7.1.5 Install Rear Pedestal Covers

2 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 8

Screw
2000-M6-17 M6 Washers 8
4 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 5

Screw
Figure 225 Installation of Rear Pedestal Covers
1. Obtain the bag of fasteners that is taped to the inside of the Left Rear Pedestal Cover. This bag
contains all the mounting fasteners for the Rear Pedestal Bumpers and Covers.
2. Install the Right Rear Pedestal Bumper (5328946) and Left Rear Pedestal Bumper (5328947) using
four (4) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33) and M6 Washers (2000-M6-17) on each
bumper.
3. Move rear pedestal covers into place.
4. Attach with the remaining five (5) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
7.2 Install Cable Curtain at Top of Magnet (Optional)
7.2.1 Overview
If the site has designated that the Curtain Cover Kit (5376552) is to be installed, the two Curtain Rails
(5376547) should have already been positioned and installed in the drop-down ceiling. The following
procedure provides instructions for cutting to length the curtain and installing it on the curtain rail. The
Curtain and associated installation parts were delivered with the Curtain Cover Kit prior to the delivery
of the components that are installed using the following procedure steps.
7.2.2 Installation of Cable Curtain (Optional)
7.2.2.1 Measure for Length of Curtain

1. Measure the distance from the ceiling to the top covers of the magnet.
2. Alternative Measuring Method - Measure the distance from the ceiling to the top of the magnet
cylinder and subtract 212mm.
Figure 226 Curtain Measurement
7.2.2.2 Cut Curtain to Length

1. Measure the length of curtain to be installed for both Front and Back curtain.
2. Cut curtains to length.
Figure 227 Measure and Cut Curtain
7.2.2.3 Attach Weight Bars to Curtain

Curtain weight bars are to be installed at the bottom of the Front and Back curtains as indicated in
illustration below.
1. Measure and mark the indicated location distances below on the inside of each curtain.
2. Position each of the different size A, B, and C Curtain Weight Bars and mark the mounting holes for
each.
3. Create a small hole in the curtain at each mounting hole location.
4. Attach the A, B, and C bars to the curtain by inserting a Plastic Pin Clip (5241226-3) thru the hole in
the curtain into the mounting holes of each bar.
Figure 228 Installation of Curtain Weights
7.2.2.4 Attach Curtain to Rail

The views below show the enclosure side, top, and cable covers installed. It may be preferable to install
the curtain covers with these covers removed.
1. Install Front cover first. Align the right hand edge of curtain with gap in ceiling rail velcro.
2. Align top edge of curtain flush with velcro as curtain is being wrapped around to the left side.
3. Install Rear Cover. Start on right hand side with overlap on Front Curtain.
4. Wrap around back to left hand side.
Figure 229 Installation of Curtain
7.3 Install Laser Alignment Light Warning Label

The magnet enclosure is shipped with a label in English attached below the laser light.
Figure 230 Warning Labels
1. A sheet of Laser Alignment Light Warning Labels has been supplied with the magnet, attached to
the magnet bridge. An example of one of the labels on the sheet is shown above.
2. For those sites which require a label other than English, peel off the appropriate label and affix over
the English label at the laser light location.
7.4 Patient Transport Installation

Patient Transport is shipped covered with protective cardboard which should remain in place until ready
to be moved into the magnet room. Cover table with plastic previously removed when checks and
adjustments are completed.
NOTE
If hardware fastening procedures for installation of the dock and support brackets were
followed, the hardware used to fasten the dock and dock supports was left loose. The
loose hardware permits a quick and easy dock centering adjustment with table docked.
Figure 231 Patient Transport
1. Unlock casters and move Patient Transport to magnet room for adjustments and function checks at
the dock.
2. Remove protective plastic sheet from table.
3. Perform mechanical procedures in MR Service Methods DVD, Adjustments and Calibrations: Patient
Table
NOTICE
All Patient Transport covers must be installed after all adjustments,

calibrations, and functional checks have been completed. The front cover is
used to depress switch on dock that establishes table type.
Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w GEM and Artist Systems
Chapter 8 Final Enclosure Installation for

MR450w GEM and Artist Systems
8.1 Installation of enclosure cover brackets

For clarity, installed components and cables are not shown on the following illustrations.
The installation procedures for MR450w GEM and Artist systems are the same. However, some
illustrations show details specific to the MR450w GEM (such as the side electronics plate and rear cover
middle mount on the left side of the magnet).
8.1.1 Install enclosure side frames

1 1000-M10C080-33 M10 x 80mm HSHC 2

Screws
2000-M10-17 M10 Stainless Steel Flat 2

Washers
3 1000-M10C025-33 M10 x 25 Socket Head 2

Cap Screws

Washers
4 1000M10C040-33 M10 x 40mm HSHC Screw 2
1000-M10C030-33 M10 x 30 Socket Head 2

Screws
5372304 M10 Flat Side Washers 2

Washers
3002-M10C-31 M10 Stainless Steel Nuts 4
Figure 232 Top side frame
1. Locate the Right Side Enclosure Top Frame (5410286-2) and mount to L-Brackets using two (2) M10
x 80mm HSHC Screws (1000-M10C080-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Flat Washers (2000-M10-17) at
each end as shown.
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please locate the Right Side Enclosure Top Frame (5401955-2)
2. Position the Middle Support Frame (5414810) between magnet mounting block and top frame.
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please position the Middle Support Frame (5414810-9500)
3. Fasten to mounting block using two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screwss (1000-M10C025-33)
and M10 Stainless Steel Flat Washers (2000-M10-17).
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please use two (2) M10 x 25 Socket Head Cap Screws (1000-
M10C025-33) and M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17).
4. Fasten Middle Support Bracket to Top Frame using two (2) M10 x 40mm HSHC Screws
(1000M10C040-33) at the top, two (2) M10 x 30 Socket Head Screws (1000-M10C030-33) at the
bottom, two (2) M10 Flat Side Washers (5372304) at the top as shown, six (6) M10 Stainless Steel
Flat Washers (2000-M10-17), and four (4) M10 Stainless Steel Nuts (3002-M10C-31).
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, Fasten Middle Support Bracket to Top Frame using four (4) M10 x
40mm HSHC Screws (1000-M10C030-40) at the top and bottom, two (2) M10 Flat
Side Washers (5372304) at the top as shown, six (6) M10 Stainless Steel Flat Washers
(2000-M10-17), and four (4) M10 Stainless Steel Nuts (3002-M10C-31).
5. Repeat above steps for installing Left Side Enclosure Top Frame (5410286).
NOTE
For IPM Magnet, please Repeat above steps for installing Left Side Enclosure Top
Frame (5401955)
8.1.2 Install enclosure mid cover brackets for HM Magnet

1 5407301-12* M20 x 115mm Adjusting 1

Screw
3001-M20C-37* M20 Stainless Steel Hex 1

Nut
2 1000-M10C025-31 M10 x 25mm HSHC screw 2

Washers
5406021 M10 x 50mm fiberglass 2

flat washer
3 5304319* M10 x 60mm Nylon Grub 2

Screw
3000-M10C-40* M10 Brass Nut 2
6 1000-M10C020-31* M10 x 20mm HSHC Screw 1
2000-M10-30* M10 Nylon Washer 1
1000-M10C030-31* M10 x 30mm HSHC Screw 1
2000-M10-30* M10 Nylon Washer 1
8 5407301-12* M20 x 115mm Adjusting 1

Screw
3001-M20C-37* M20 Stainless Steel Hex 1

Nut
Figure 233 Right side mid bracket assembly
1. At each end of the Right Side Cover Bracket (5415974), install an M20 x 115mm Adjusting Screw
(5407301-12) and a M20 Stainless Steel Hex Nut (3001-M20C-37) at the two locations indicated.
The distance will be adjusted when the covers are installed in later procedures.
2. Fasten the Right Side Cover Bracket to the right side Cross Bar Bracket (5415975) using two (2)
M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31), two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-
M10-17), and two (2) M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat washers (5406021).
3. At the two locations indicated, install M10 x 60mm Nylon Grub Screw (5304319) and M10 Brass Nut
(3000-M10C-40).
Figure 234 Right side mid bracket installation
4. The Spacer Suspension Block (5410704) will be placed between the Magnet and the Rear Cover
Fixture Plate (5410705).
5. Install the Spacer Suspension Block and the Rear Cover Fixture Plate to the magnet.
6. Install the Cross Bar assembly. For the front location, use a M10 x 20mm HSHC Screw (1000-
M10C020-31) and M10 Nylon Washer (2000-M10-30). For the rear location, use a M10 x 30mm
HSHC Screw (1000-M10C030-31) and M10 Nylon Washer (2000-M10-30).
7. Adjust M10 Grub screws to touch magnet for support of Cross Bar assembly.
8. Install an M20 x 115mm Adjusting Screw (5407301-12) and a M20 Stainless Steel Hex Nut (3001-
M20C-37) at location indicated. The distance will be adjusted when the covers are installed in later
procedures.
8.1.3 Install middle right side cover bracket for IPM Magnet

Washers

flat washer

Washers

flat washer
Figure 235 Install middle right side cover bracket for IPM Magnet
1. Locate Middle Cover Bracket (5439826-2) and position against existing bracket mounted on
magnet.
2. Fasten bracket using two (2) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31), two (2) M10 Stainless
Steel Washers (2000-M10-17), and two (2) M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat washers (5406021).
3. Locate left Middle Cover Bracket 5439826-2 to side plate and fasten using two (2) M10 x 25mm
HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31), two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers (2000-M10-17), and two
(2) M10 x 50mm fiberglass flat washers (5406021).
8.1.4 Install enclosure lower cover brackets for IPM Magnet


washer

washer
Figure 236 Install enclosure lower cover brackets for IPM Magnet
1. Locate the Right bottom beam brackets (5438605-9000).

2. Fasten to magnet feet using four (4) M12 x 40mm HSHC screws (1000-M12C040-33) and four (4)
M12 Stainless Steel Flat washers (2001-M12-17).
3. Locate the Left bottom beam brackets 5445021-9000 and fasten to left side of magnet using four
(4) M12 x 40mm HSHC screws (1000-M12C040-33) and four (4) M12 Stainless Steel Flat washers
(2001-M12-17).
8.1.5 Install enclosure lower cover brackets for HM Magnet

2 1000-M10C025-31* M10 x 25mm HSHC screw 4
2000-M10-30* M10 Nylon Washers 4
3 E08-MC024-30* 1/2 -13 x 1.5” long Hex 4

Head Bolt
5405904* M12 x 70mm Fiberglass 4

Flat Washer
Figure 237 Right side lower bracket installation
1. Locate the following lower right side parts:

• Beam, 5411759 (1)
• Front/Rear Bracket, 5411769 (1)
• Front/Rear Bracket, 5411769-2 (1)

• L-Bracket, 5411765 (2)
2. Assemble with M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-
M10-30).
3. Fasten to magnet legs using 1/2 -13 x 1.5” long Hex Head Bolt (E08-MC024-30) and M12 x 70mm
Fiberglass Flat Washer (5405904), one set at each leg.
Figure 238 Left side lower bracket installation
4. Repeat above steps to install right side lower bracket assembly.
8.2 Installation of enclosure covers

8.2.1 Enclosure covers
The following illustration is an overview of all the covers. All will be fastened to the magnets using M10 x
25mm HSHC screw (1000-M10C025-31) except the fastener for where the side covers meet. M6 x
16mm HSHC Screws (1000-M6C016-31) will be used to secure the bottom of the side middle cover and
the front and rear cover.
Figure 239 Enclosure cover overview
The following illustration calls out the cover names.
Figure 240 Naming convention for covers
NOTE
The left side front cover is the same as the right side rear cover. They are interchangeable.
So are the right side front cover with the left side rear cover.
8.2.2 Installation of top covers

2000-M10-30 M10 Nylon Washers 6
Figure 241 Top covers
1. With one person holding each side, lift and slide the front top cover into place.
2. Fasten in place with three (3) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon
Washers (2000-M10-30) on each side.
NOTE
For both the left rear and right rear top covers, make sure the tab interfaces with the
top front cover at the seam.
3. Position the left top rear cover and fasten in place with five (5) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-
M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
4. Position the right rear top cover and fasten in place with five (5) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-
M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
8.2.3 Installation of rear magnet covers

3 1000-M6C030-31 M6 x 30mm HSHC Screws 2
Figure 242 Right and left rear covers
1. Position right rear cover and fasten with M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10
Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30) at places indicated.
2. Install left rear cover and fasten using the same locations as in previous step.
Figure 243 Cable cover
3. Position rear cable cover and fasten with two (2) M6 x 30mm HSHC Screws (1000-M6C030-31).
4. Install left and right rear trim rings.
8.2.4 Installation of front magnet covers

The following illustration indicates the locations of all the M10 fasteners for installing the covers. The
illustration will be referred to in several of the following steps for location of screws to be installed.
5 Screws are pre-assemble M4 x 14mm 5

in the panel
Required Hardware continued

11 1000-M6C050-33 M6 x 50 Socket Head 2

screw
12 1000-M10C025-31 M10 x 25mm HSHC 2

2001-M10-17 screws withM10 Stainless
Steel Washers
Others 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 2

Screw
Figure 244 Front cover fastener locations
1. Position left front cover at front of magnet. Route the three cables, M3366, M3337, and the
emergency stop cable, through the opening while installing the cover.
Figure 245 OCP cover
2. Locate OCP cover.
Figure 246 Connect OCP cables
3. Fasten two (2) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and two (2) M10 Nylon Washers
(2000-M10-30).
4. Connect the three cables to the Left Control Panel (LCP) as marked. Note the two (2) M10 x 25mm
HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30) attaching the cover to
the mounting bracket.
WARNING
PROJECTILE HAZARD
This procedure requires removal of ferrous material in close proximity to
the magnet.
Keep operator control panel away from front of the magnet bore.
5. Fasten the LCP to the cover using the five (5) M4 x 14mm provided screws.
Figure 247 Left front cover
6. Secure the cover in place by fastening with M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and
M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
7. Repeat above steps for installing right front cover and RCP.
8. Both covers have vertical light strips attached. Refer to cable map and connect Runs M3382 and
M3383 to each light as marked. Connect these two cables to Run M3379 which has been routed
from the magnet I/O Panel. Connect the LED Switch into the opening on the front panel of the PAC.
Unscrew the switch lock nut, insert the switch into the hole, and reconnect the lock nut. Connect
the LED Switch cable, routed from the PAC, to J60 on Run M3379.
9. Connect the left and right covers with six (6) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31) and
M10 Nylon Washers (2000-M10-30).
10. Connect the left and right covers with three (3) M10 x 25mm HSHC screws (1000-M10C025-31),
two (2) M10 Stainless Steel Washers ( 2001-M10-17) and one (1) M10 Nylon Washer (2000-
M10-30).
11. Install the bridge cover with two (2) M6 x 50 Socket Head screws (1000-M6C050-33).
12. Install the bridge cover with two (2) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
13. Install left and right trim rings.
8.2.5 IRD cover installation

1 1000-M6C016-33* M6 x 16 Socket Head 4

Screw
2 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 4

Screw
3 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 4

Screw
1. Remove the four (4) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33) on the IRD bracket.
Figure 248 IRD outer bracket cover screws
2. Install the left and right IRD Rear Pivot Covers (5395809 and 5395808) using the four (4) M6 x 16
Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
Figure 249 Install rear pivot covers
3. Install the left and right IRD Front Pivot Covers (5396352 & 5396351) using the four (4) M6 x 16
Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33).
Figure 250 Install front pivot covers
8.2.6 Left and right side cover adjustments

The following illustration shows the three adjustment areas for obtaining a proper fit of the front and
rear side covers for both sides of the magnet. When adjusted properly, the middle side cover on each
side of the enclosure should install easily.
Figure 251 Side cover adjustment points
Figure 252 Side cover adjustment points for IPM Magnet
1. Mid-cover adjustment screws for side covers.

2. Front and rear cover adjustment brackets for left and right sides.
3. Lower adjustment brackets for side covers.
8.2.7 Installation of front and rear magnet side covers

3 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 1

Screw
2000-M6-10 M6 Stainless Steel Wash- 1

er
1. Position all four covers for left and right side on their support brackets.
Figure 253 Front and rear side covers
2. If adjustment is necessary, refer to the three areas of adjustment in the previous procedure.
3. Fasten side covers together, as shown above, with an M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw (1000-
M6C016-33) and M6 Stainless Steel Washer (2000-M6-10).
4. Repeat steps for other side of magnet.
8.2.8 Installation of left and right side middle covers

3 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 1

Screw

er
Figure 254 Left side middle cover
NOTICE
When installing the left side middle cover, carefully thread the top PG cable
through the cable opening in the cover. The PG cable is fiber optic and
should be handled with care.
1. Holding the cover on each side, lift cover up and position on the two support brackets.
2. Feed the PG cable through the opening and coil and hang on hook.
3. Fasten with an M6 x 16 Socket Head Screw (1000-M6C016-33) and M6 Stainless Steel Washer
(2000-M6-10) at bottom of cover.
4. Install right side middle cover using the above steps.
8.2.9 PAC alignment with cover

Check the alignment of the PAC with the enclosure in all three planes. The gap between the I/O panel
and the enclosure side cover opening should be less than 1 mm.
Figure 255 PAC alignment
1. There are eight screws that allow for adjustment up/down, left/right, and in/out.
2. The PAC I/O panel should be adjusted so that it lines up with the slot in the enclosure side cover
opening in the left/right and up/down plane, and adjusted in/out so the gap between the I/O panel
and the enclosure is less than 1 mm.
8.2.10 Bonding triangular brackets

After all the covers have been aligned and fitted, remove the side covers so that the triangular brackets
assemblies supporting the left and right top frames can be bonded.
CAUTION
POTENTIAL HEALTH HAZARD
Epoxy can be a flammable liquid and vapor. Can cause skin irritation. May
be harmful if swallowed. Contact with eyes will cause irritation.
Wear proper protective equipment. To avoid skin contact, wear neoprene of
butylrubber gloves.
Figure 256 Front and rear brackets
1. For left and right rear triangular brackets, insert epoxy in openings between L-bracket and spacer.
2. Insert epoxy in openings between spacer and triangular mount.
3. For left and right front triangular brackets, insert epoxy between L-bracket and triangular mount.
8.2.11 Installation of rear pedestal covers

2 1000-M6C016-33 M6 x 16 Socket Head 5

Screw

er
Figure 257 Rear pedestal covers
1. Align left and right rear pedestal covers with ball studs and secure to rear pedestal.
2. Fasten the rear pedestal covers with five (5) M6 x 16 Socket Head Screws (1000-M6C016-33) at the
top of each cover and one holding both covers at the lower back).
8.2.12 Cable Management Kit

The GEM Cable Management Kit (5507135) should not be installed at this time. The kit should be
installed after the patient table(s) have been properly aligned.
8.3 Cable Concealment Kit installation

8.3.1 Overview
If the site has designated that the optional Cable Concealment Kit (5418562) is to be installed, the
ceiling rail should have already been positioned and installed in the drop-down ceiling. The following
procedure provides instructions for cutting to length the side panels and installing them on the ceiling
rail. The side panels and associated installation parts were delivered with the Cable Concealment Kit
prior to the delivery of the components that are installed using the following procedure steps
8.3.2 Install ceiling outer frame

Figure 258 Installed ceiling rail
1. The ceiling rail (inner frame) has already been installed.
Figure 259 Ceiling rail set screws and latch
2. Make note of the set screw and latch.
Figure 260 Ceiling outer frame assembly
3. Assemble the two parts of the Ceiling Outer Frame (5418432) using two (2) M6 x 16mm SS HSHC
Screws (1000-M6C016-31).
Figure 261 Inner and outer frame assembly
4. Lift the outer frame and slide into the inner frame as shown above.
Figure 262 Panel height measurement
5. Depending on ceiling height, the four side panels (Front - 5418434, Rear - 5418435, Right Side -
5418436, and Left Side - 5418437) might need to be cut to fit inside the magnet enclosure top
covers. When installed, the bottom of the covers should be a minimum of 25 mm (1inch) below the
top of the enclosure covers.
Figure 263 Cutting side panels to length
6. After obtaining desired length, move the four side covers outside of magnet room. Mark and cut
with circular saw. File cut edges to remove sharp corners. Repeat for all four covers.
Figure 264 Front and left side panel installation
7. Install the front panel. Install the left side panel. The front edge of the left side panel must be on the
outside of the front panel flange.
Figure 265 Rear and right side panel installation
8. Slide rear panel into place. Install the right side panel (not shown). Make sure the panel is on the
outside of the front and rear panels.
Figure 266 Gap adjustment of covers
9. Using the set screws and locknuts located at all four corners of the inner frame, adjust the outer
frame and side panels to fit into top enclosure cover opening with equal gaps all around.
Figure 267 Installation of ceiling nut plate
10. A Ceiling Nut Plate (5418438) will be installed at the bottom of each of the four corners.
NOTE
Make sure that the hole to be drilled will be just above the magnet enclosure top
covers. This is required for access to the screws for installation and service.
• Remove liner over double-stick tape and apply to inside flange of the front or rear panel.
• Mark where threaded hole in ceiling nut plate contacts the side panel.
• Move side panel outside of magnet room and drill a #8 (5/32 inch) hole as marked.
11. Repeat above step for all four corners.

12. Install all covers and secure together using four (4) M6 x 16 mm Pan Head Screws (2394027).
8.4 PA coil installation in patient table
8.4.1 Overview
This process is used to install the GEM PA coil into the patient table.
8.4.2 Preliminary requirements
8.4.2.1 Tools
Item Qty
Flat-head Screwdriver 1
Phillips-head Screwdriver 1
Small Phillips-head Screwdriver 1
Slip Joint Pliers or Small Crescent Wrench 1
8.4.2.2 Parts
Item FRU Part Number Qty
1.5T GEM PA Coil See FRU manual 1
8.4.3 Installation procedure

NOTICE
The patient table cannot be docked to the system to perform a PA Coil

installation.
1. Remove the patient table from the Magnet Room, and lock the wheels on the table to prevent it
from moving.
2. Locate the front of the patient table and the buttons. Push the button labeled 1 down toward the
floor while pushing the button labeled 2 in.
Figure 268 Location of table buttons
3. Continue pushing in both buttons, and pull the cradle toward you until a click is heard and the
cradle stops moving.
Figure 269 Pulling cradle
4. Lift up on the center of the cradle, and pull the cradle toward you until the rear of the cradle clears
the cradle guide rails.
Figure 270 Cradle guide rails
5. Locate the rear of the cradle, remove the two inner screws with a Phillips-head screwdriver, and lift
the plastic cradle cover out.
Figure 271 Removing cradle cover
6. Lift the rear of the cradle, and remove the screw on the left and right side of the cradle.
Figure 272 Screw location on cradle (right side shown)
7. Remove the upper two screws on the plastic pieces and rotate them as shown.
Figure 273 Screws and plastic pieces
8. Remove the three center screws shown above; lift and remove the rear section of the cover from
the cradle.
Figure 274 Rear section of cradle cover removed
9. Remove the left and right strap rails by sliding each from the middle and front sections of the
cradle. (To make it easier to remove the strap rails, release the cradle from the guide rails and lift it
toward the back of the table.)
Figure 275 Removing left and right strap rails
10. Lift up on the on the cradle as shown in Figure 270 on page 328 and push it back into position.
NOTICE
Before performing the next task, make sure the surface is clear of all
materials such as any screws, tools or plastic parts previously removed.
11. Remove the cradle cover by lifting up and sliding the cover out from the front of the cradle.
Figure 276 Removing cradle cover
12. Remove the shoulder screw.
Figure 277 Removing shoulder screw
13. Remove the four screws securing the 2 end ribs to the cradle (one near the front and one near the
rear section of the cradle.)
Figure 278 Removing screws on end rib
14. Remove the foam insert from the table.
Figure 279 Foam insert
15. Flex the cotton rod at the middle section of the cradle. Carefully slide it out from the rear section of
the cradle.
Be careful not to break the 2 pins at the end of the cotton rod or lose any of the 4 compression
springs.
16. Place the PA coil into the table and orient so the cable faces the end of the table labeled Rear.
Figure 280 Table end labeled rear
17. With the cotton rod loose (move it to one side), connect the cables from the new PA coil to the
cables in the table. See illustration below for cable routing. Ensure the spacer bracket is properly
oriented.
The PA coil will rest on the side of the table while the cables are being connected. See Figure 280 on
page 332.
Figure 281 Connecting PA cables to table cables
18. When all the cables are connected (with the PA coil resting on the side of the table), restore the 4
compression springs to the 2 pins at the end of the cotton rod.
19. Flex the cotton road at the middle section of the cradle and reconnect to the rear section of the
cradle. Re-install the shoulder screw.
20. Place the PA coil into the cradle and orient so the cables face the end of the table (labeled REAR).
21. Reinstall the 2 end ribs with 2 screws shown in Figure 278 on page 331.
22. Secure the PA Coil to the table with six screws that are in a small resealable plastic bag in the table
as shown in Figure 282 on page 334.
Figure 282 PA coil screws
NOTE
It may be necessary to use a screwdriver to perforate amber-tinted film over screw
holes to permit reinstallation of screws to secure coil. Do not remove film from coil
surface as its presence prevents loose hardware from failing into coil and causing
damage to coil internal electronic circuitry.
23. Place the cradle cover on the cradle, ensuring the front edge of the cover slides into the groove of
the cradle’s front section and lower the cover onto the cradle.
Figure 283 Replacing cradle cover
24. Refer to Figure 268 on page 327. Locate the front of the patient table and the buttons. Push the
button labeled 1 down toward the floor while pushing the button labeled 2 in.
25. Continue pushing in both buttons, and pull the cradle toward you (as shown in Figure 269 on
page 327) until a click is heard and the cradle stops moving.
26. Refer to Figure 270 on page 328. Lift up on the center of the cradle, and pull the cradle toward you
until the rear of the cradle clears the cradle guide rails.
27. Reinstall the left and right strap rails (shown in Figure 275 on page 330) by sliding from the middle
and back sections. Ensure there is no gap between the strap rails and the cradle front section.
Figure 284 Eliminating gap between strap rails and cradle
28. Reinstall the rear section cover housing, and secure with the screws as shown. Ensure the cradle
cover slides into the groove of the cover housing.
Figure 285 Reinstalling rear cradle cover
29. Lift the rear of the cradle, and reinstall the screws on the left and right side of the cradle shown in
Figure 272 on page 328.
30. Reinstall the last cover with the two inner screws shown on the left in Figure 273 on page 329.
31. Lift up on the on the cradle and push it back into position.
Figure 286 Positioning cradle
8.4.4 Finalization
After start-up, complete the test for the PA coil: Run the Multi-Coil Quality Assurance Tool.
Operator Workspace Installation
Chapter 9 Operator Workspace Installation
9.1 Operator workspace
9.1.1 Operator workspace table anchor installation

The customer may have the operator workspace components installed on a customer designed
countertop of other type of table. If the GE supplied operator workspace table is to be installed, refer to
room layout plan and consult with Site customer for exact location of operator workspace table.
Figure 287 Position operator workspace table
1. Open palletized M1000MW box that contains the operator workspace table. Use furnished
Operator’s Workspace Table Assembly Instructions (5189137-50) to assemble the model
5191031 table.
2. Move table into designated position. Refer to room layout plan and/or consult with Site customer
for exact location of operator workspace table. Typical location with table in front of Magnet Room
viewing window is shown below.
NOTICE
Two individuals are required to move and position operator workspace

table.
NOTE
The design of the new model 5191031 table does not require anti-tip anchors. This
table meets the ANSA/BIFMA anti-tip standards.
3. If seismic anchoring is required, refer to site architectural drawings and procure and install specified
anchors.
9.1.2 GOC installation
9.1.2.1 Position GOC

Consult with Site customer for exact location of Global Operator Cabinet (GOC). The location could be
underneath the left or right side of the operator workspace table, or on the outside left or right side of
the table.
Figure 288 Position of GOC
9.1.2.2 Seismic anchoring (if required)

GOC Seismic Mount kit is shipped with GOC. Find kit inside of plastic bag.
If seismic anchoring is required, refer to site architectural drawings for fastener type details or
applicable Preinstallation manual. Illustration below indicates hole location for installing brackets.
Figure 289 Install seismic brackets
9.1.3 Computer cabinet cable routing and connections

The GOC Cabinet is shipped with cables that will be routed and connected to components installed on
the top of the OW Table.
• Two power cords
• One video cable
• Keyboard cable
• SCIM cable
• Modem cable (Option)
These cables are already connected to the computer as shown in the illustration below. The remainder
of the cables to be connected to designated modules within the GOC Cabinet will to be routed through
the rear opening.
NOTICE
When routing cables at the customer site, confirm there are no unforeseen
dangers where the cables are routed.
Figure 290 Cable connections to GOC
1. Runs E0015, E3045, E3046, E3047 and E3048 are pre-connected to computer and are routed at top
of opening. (These cables are inside of plastic bag)
2. Runs E0003, E3011, E3015, E3017, E3018, the power cord for the Patient Alert system, and any
other option cables will be routed through the rear opening.
3. Route all cables before connecting any cables. Refer to cable map for connection information.
NOTE
Make sure a cable service loop of at least 4 feet (1300mm) is provided for future
servicing.
4. If GOC cabinet is to be located under OW Table, the cable coming out of the opening at the rear of
the cabinet will be routed below the Back Panel. Cables routed from components on top of table
will be routed above back panel.
5. Instructions for connection of cables to GOC are provided in later procedures.
9.1.4 GOC cabinet cover removal

The Computer Cabinet covers need to be removed to access the cable connection points.
Figure 291 Remove GOC covers
1. For right side cover, remove two screws and lift up. Disconnect Ground cable connector and remove
the cover.
2. For left side cover, remove two screws and lift up. Disconnect Ground cable connector and remove
the cover.
NOTE
A ground wire is connected to each side cover. Use care when removing side covers.
3. Peel the two shipping tapes off from PC.
9.1.5 GOC cable connections

The connection points of cables routed to the GOC modules and the PC are described in the following
sections. Refer to cable map for connection information.
Figure 292 GOC cable connections
1. Refer to Power and ground connections on page 343 for system power and ground cable
connections to GOC.
2. Refer to OW component power cable connections to PDM on page 343 for OW component power
cable connections to GOC PDU. Make sure Patient Alert power is connected to J3. If Modem is
installed, power cable is connected to J7.
3. Refer to Data cable connections on page 345 for all cables connected to Linux PC computer and
GOC modules.
4. Refer to In-Room Display (IRD) installation on page 350 for IRD component installation procedures
in GOC. (If IRD is installed at this site.)
5. After all cables are installed, route cables through clamp. Tighten clamp to secure cables in place.
NOTE
GOC Breaker is located at here. Route the cables so that the cable won’t turn the
Breaker OFF by accident.
9.1.5.1 Power and ground connections
Figure 293 GOC power and ground cables
1. Connect Ground wire E4008 to GND stud.
NOTE
Make sure nut is firmly tightened to GND stud.
2. Before connecting GOC power cable E0003 to J1, loosen screws and remove cover.
3. Route and connect GOC power cable to J1 on PDU.
4. Confirm that GOC Power Cable is firmly connected to J1 by pulling the cable once. Re-install cover
and tighten screws.
9.1.5.2 OW component power cable connections to PDM

The illustration shows the power cable connection locations to the power strip in the GOC cabinet.
Make sure power cables are attached as shown.
Also refer to cable map for information on power cable connections to OW1-PDM.
Figure 294 Connect GOC power cables
1. If Modem is installed, route power cable and connect to J7.

2. Tie-wrap point for Modem power cable.
3. Route power cables connected to J3 thru J7 through access hole.
4. Route and connect Patient Alert power cable to J3 and tie-wrap at this point.
5. Tie-wrap power cables J4 to J7 at this point.
9.1.5.3 Data cable connections

Many of the cables shown in illustration are pre-connected. Instructions for routing and connecting
cables for USB mouse, keyboard, host display, and SCIM are provided in Install monitor, and SCIM and
keyboard on page 353.
Figure 295 Cable connections
1. Connect Run E3031 to J7 on GOC AA.

2. For older GOCs which include the 8-port hub, use ports 3, 7 or 8 for connecting site Ethernet cables
such as AW.
NOTE
Do not use any other ports for site Ethernet cables.
NOTE
For newer GOCs without an 8-port hub, a site Ethernet cable can be connected
directly to the Host PC. If multiple Ethernet connections are required to the Host PC,
a customer-supplied switch must be used.
9.1.5.4 Host PC cable connections (Z400/Z420)

The connection points of cables routed to the PC are described in the following two sections. Several of
the cables shown are delivered with the GOC and are pre-connected.
Refer to the applicable PC shown below for cable routing and connections.
Figure 296 PC connections (Z400/Z420)
1. Route and connect the following to the USB ports: Keyboard USB extension cable – Run E3048,
Mouse USB cable, Serial Converter USB connector, and IRD USB cable (option)
2. Connect Run E3011 to the Ethernet connection port.
For the z420 PC, Run E3011 MUST be connected to the RIGHT side Ethernet port.
3. Connect Run E3011 to the RIGHT Ethernet port for both z400 and z420 (location of item 2 on the
z420 PC shown in Figure 296 on page 346 applies to both z400 and z420).
Connect the site network cable (or GOC Hub if available) to the onboard Ethernet port (location of
item 2 on the z400 PC Figure 296 on page 346 applies to z400 only).
4. Connect Runs E3015, E3017, and E3018 to FJ6, FJ5, and FJ7 as marked.
5. Monitor cable Run E3046 will be connected to MNTR1 port.
6. If the IRD option is installed, connect DVI–D cable to MNTR2 port.
9.1.5.5 Host PC cable connections (Dell T5810)

The connection points of cables routed to the PC are described as follows. Several of the cables shown
are delivered with the GOC and are preconnected.
Figure 297 PC area connections (Dell T5810)
1. See Figure 297 on page 347. Route and connect PC power cord.
2. Run E3011 MUST be connected to the RIGHT side Ethernet port.
3. If the IRD option is installed, connect DVI-D cable to MNTR2 port PCI5.
4. Monitor cable Run E3046 will be connected to MNTR1 port PCI2.
5. Route and connect the Line In and Line Out cables from the GOCAA.
6. For older GOCs which include a hub, route and connect Ethernet cable from GOC hub to this port.
For newer GOCs without a hub, this port is available for connecting with a service laptop, site
network, or AW option. If connection to multiple Ethernet devices is required, a customer-supplied
switch must be used.
7. Route and connect USB cable from IRD to USB 2.0 port.
8. Route and connect USB-RS422 Converter cable to USB 2.0 port.
9. (For Artist/T/XT) Route and connect USB extender cable E3037 to USB 3.0 port.
10. Connect optional BrainWave accessory cable.
11. Connect mouse (Run E3048) to USB 3.0 port.
12. Connect keyboard extension cable.
13. Connect optional BrainWave video cable.
14. Item 14 in Figure 297 on page 347 has no connection.
15. Connect Runs E3015, E3017, and E3018 to FJ6, FJ5, and FJ7 as marked.
16. Dress and secure cables.
9.1.5.6 Host PC cable connections (Dell T5820)

The connection points of cables routed to the PC are described as follows. Several of the cables shown
are delivered with the GOC and are preconnected.
Use the below figures and tables as reference.
Figure 298 GOC with Dell T5820
Figure 299 PC area connections (Dell T5820)
Table 30 Dell T5820 cable configuration
Item Run # Description
1 NA Line In/Out cable to GOCAA J12/14
2 NA Site network Ethernet cable
3 NA Mouse USB cable
4 E3048 Keyboard USB extender cable to keyboard USB cable
5 E3037 ICE USB extender cable
6 NA USB-RS422 Converter USB cable to USB-RS422 Converter
7 NA IRDC USB cable to IRDC J1
8 NA NA
9 NA NA
10 NA IRDC miniDP cable to IRDC J2
11 E3046 Host LCD Monitor miniDP cable to Host LCD Monitor
12 E3011 ETH1 (right port) cable to PGR J2
13 NA Power cable
9.1.5.7 In-Room Display (IRD) installation

Complete this procedure if IRD is part of system installation. The GOC is delivered with cables pre-
installed for connection to the Fiber Optic Converter Box.
NOTE
Newer GOCs do not include the 8-port hub shown in some of the following illustrations.
Figure 300 Install fiber optic converter box
1. Disconnect and discard jumper cable (5330299-2) connected to E3019 and Sensor cable.
2. Install Fiber Optic Converter Box (5435410-2) using the provided four M5 screws
3. Connect the DVI-D cable from the Host PC to J2.
4. Route fiber optic cable Run P2026 to GOC and connect to J3.
5. Connect the USB cable from the Host PC to J1.
6. Connect Run E3019 to J4 and the Sensor cable to J5.
Figure 301 Secure fiber optic cable
7. Secure the fiber optic cable with tie wraps at points indicated below. Tie the tie wrap loosely as to
not damage the optical cable.
NOTE
Do NOT tighten the tie wraps firmly. Damage to the optical cable will occur if tie wrap
is to tight.
NOTE
On newer systems, the IRD connection is pre-installed on the GOC at the factory if
applicable.
9.1.6 Install modem cable to GOC cabinet (if applicable)

If Modem is part of system installation or upgrade, it will be placed on Operator Table or GOC.
Figure 302 Modem installation
1. Modem cable to the Linux PC is provided. Connect Run E3045 to Modem.

2. Modem power cord must be connected to J7 on GOC PDU Module. Route this cable to the rear top
of the GOC Cabinet.
9.1.7 Restore GOC covers

Figure 303 Install GOC covers
1. Connect Ground cables and install both side covers by inserting tabs at top of covers into slots.
2. Install screws that were removed in earlier procedure.
9.1.8 Install temperature and humidity sensor on GOC

Figure 304 Install sensor on GOC
1. Attach iButton Sensor assembly (Holder, 5141856, and iButton 5141857), to back of GOC Cabinet
at this location using Dual Locking Velcro Tape (2341779 & 2341779-2).
2. Connect cable (5267721) to Sensor.
9.1.9 Install monitor, and SCIM and keyboard

Consult with Site customer for exact location of SCIM/Keyboard and Monitor on operator workspace
table.
Figure 305 Monitor, SCIM and keyboard installation
1. Position Host Display Monitor, SCIM, Mouse, and keyboard on table.

2. Place keyboard in front of SCIM, pull the keyboard forward, flip it, and place on top of the SCIM up
side down.
3. Remove the plastic strips from the Velcro located on SCIM plate, exposing the adhesive surface (see
illustration on next page).
4. Guide the cable back into the center notched opening until all the cable is under the SCIM base.
5. Place the keyboard tight against the SCIM, Center it as best as possible, and drop into place. The
Velcro pads will now be sticking to the bottom of the keyboard.
6. Connect Mouse cable to USB port at rear of computer in GOC.
7. Connect Run E3048 to USB Keyboard cable. Route and connect other end to computer in GOC.
8. Connect Run E3047 to SCIM. Route and connect other end to computer in GOC.
9. Route and connect Runs E0015 (LCD monitor power cable) and E3046 (DVI-D cable) from the GOC
to the monitor. For E0015, use power cord adapter 5412946-2 to connect E0015 to the monitor.
Figure 306 LCD Monitor Power Cord Adapter (5412946-2)
NOTE
The adhesive on the Velcro takes 24 hours to completely adhere to the bottom of the
keyboard. Allow the adhesive to dry completely before removing keyboard from SCIM
base.
9.1.10 Final positioning of GOC cabinet

1. Use the spiral tube to bind the following cables. (Length of spiral tube is about 1 m.) Spiral tube is
included in the plastic bag which is shipped with GOC.
Figure 307 Complete cabling of GOC
• Two power cords

• One video cable
• Keyboard cable
• SCIM cable
2. Place cabinet in final position as determined by customer.
9.1.11 Power on information

When powering up the GOC, make sure the Main breaker located in the rear of the GOC is ON.
Checklist
Chapter 10 Checklist
10.1 Completion checklist

10.1.1 Mechanical installation completion checklist
The following steps need to be reviewed and completed by GE Field Engineer, especially if the system
was installed by non-GE personnel.
Check off boxes at the front of each item below when complete.
• □ Check mechanical flowchart to make sure all steps are complete
• □ Resolve shipment shortages
• □ Resolve omissions by mechanical contractors
• □ Make sure all rating plates are installed
• □ Recheck all wiring connections using cable map
• □ Correct for wiring errors if necessary
• □ Recheck all coolant hose connections for tightness and that there are no leaks. Correct if
necessary.
• □ Recheck all air hose connections for tightness and that there are no leaks. Correct if necessary.
10.1.2 Returning shipping material

The shipping material must be returned as soon as possible . Prompt return is required so that
production shipments can continue with these labor saving dollies and carts. These can be included with
the Return pile, Recycling Operation will route them to appropriate location.
10.1.3 Final mechanical installation steps

1. Complete assembly of PPG cable and probe head.
2. Make sure all cabinet, magnet enclosure, and rear pedestal covers have been installed.
3. Make sure all safety and warning labels have been installed.
4. Make sure patient transport is in position at front of magnet.
10.2 GE Field Engineer responsibilities

10.2.1 Phantoms and service kits
1. Locate the following:
Checklist
• (For systems with DV28.0 and earlier software) Locate the phantom kit and SPT phantom
cart kit.
• (For systems with DV29.0 and later software) Locate the phantom kit.
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The phantom cart and the
LVshim phantom side lobes are not used and are not delivered with the system.
NOTE
(For systems with DV29.0 and later software) The LVshim phantom inner
ball, and the body TLT and loader phantom will ship together with their storage
holder pads. Do not discard the storage holder pads with the packing material.
2. Unpack the phantoms carefully to reduce risk of damage, breakage, or chemical spill.
3. Locate the multilingual (provided in eight languages) phantom attention labels shipped with each of
the phantoms.
NOTICE
Three types of multilingual phantom attention labels are provided and

each type must be applied to the correct phantom. The directions at the
top of each label sheet describe which phantoms that can receive that
label.
4. Read the directions provided at the top of each of the multilingual attention label sheets and apply
the appropriate language attention label for the site to each of the phantoms that should receive
that type of label.
a. Each phantom will receive the correct type of attention label written in the appropriate
language for that site.
b. (For systems with DV28.0 and earlier software) Note that the LVshim phantom assembly
will receive 3 labels, one for each phantom component.
10.2.2 Final GE Field Engineer installation steps

1. Complete the gradient filter cable connection safety check:
a. Make sure only the required gradient cable crimping tools were used in this installation, GEHC
5790054.
b. Visually inspect end of gradient lugs and confirm the gradient wire extends to the end of the
barrel and that there are no frayed or cut wires per procedure.
c. Make sure the compression identifies the correct embossed lug number; #24 ground lug, #42 1
AWG X and Y axis, #50 2/0 AWG Z axis, for DV systems, #42 1/0 AWG used in Pioneer/Voyager/
Premier systems.
d. Make sure there are no electrical tape or heat shrink tubing obscuring the gradient lug view.
2. Do Emergency Off Connection Safety check:
Checklist
a. Launch the Service Desktop Manager, click the Tools button and select System Shutdown
from the Tools menu.
b. Turn off the breakers for the Host, ICN (Recon), and 48V Gradient Control if you are testing
more E-Off buttons.
c. Press one of the E-Off buttons (the location of buttons was determined by the customer).
Generally, the E-Off button is located on the wall next to the computer equipment or next to
the MR magnet room doors.
d. Make sure that power was removed from the PDU by viewing the PDU phase indicator lights
and checking the input voltage test points (the lights may have burned out).
e. Make sure that power was removed from the Heat Exchange Cabinet (HEC). Both the PLC
Signal Box and VFDs lights will be off.
f. On the System Main Disconnect Panel, press the SYSTEM ON button, reset the [On] switch,
and on the PDU, press the EMO RESET button.
g. Repeat steps a through e above for all E-Off buttons, including the SYSTEM OFF button on the
MDP.
3. Record and enter applicable data into applicable site configuration files and records.
4. Complete Product Locator information for all installed serialized components, new or updated,
using either:
a. (For (U.S. Only)) FE Site Verification Web Site
b. Process and return product locator installation cards for all serialized components to: Product
Locator File, P.O. Box 414, W-523, Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414
Refer to Product Locator section in “Getting Started” for details on submitting Product Locator
information.
NOTE
Failure to fill out and return Product Locator Cards may result in failure of your site to
receive future FMIs.
5. Store the delivered site’s set of service tools in service cabinet at site.
6. Locate the surface coil (“quick disconnect”) adapters and any optional surface coils and positioning
accessories and place on Patient Transport.
7. Locate the box marked “To be opened by Applications Specialist” and set aside for a later visit by
the Applications Specialist.
8. After the Installation and Calibration Wizard (ICW) Installation workflow is complete, please
execute the e-Installation form (DOC1685408) and submit it to the e-forms repository.
9. Leave the site’s set of manuals and CD-ROM(s) at the site. Install Service and Operator
documentation on the host computer. Organize and set up the reference cabinet for the manuals.
10. Locate the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) packed with the phantoms and the gradient coil
coolant. They must be retained on site. Customer is to be informed that material with MSDS was
brought into the site and customer should know/decide where the MSDS should be retained at the
site.
Checklist
11. Make sure that coordination of application support for instruction of the site users on the
appropriate software release has been made before returning the system to the users. Turn the site
over to the Applications Specialist, who will instruct the users.
12. Staged systems are preloaded with software and configured as indicated in Getting Started,
Preloaded Software. Complete startup and calibrations as explained in SMART Installation.
Appendix
Chapter 11 Appendix
11.1 Cable specification

Cables delivered to site for installation have specifications dependent on usage. The following tables
contain information on cable runs for this system as it was originally installed, dependent on site
configuration.
Table provides definitions for the installed cables.
Table 31 Cable table definitions
Column heading Description Special notes
Description Includes the Run number, destination la- Total length of cables delivered to site,
bels of the cable, and length function of cable specifies power from da-
ta
Number of conduc- Wires in cable

tors
Certification Type designation for the cable
Voltage rating The highest voltage that may be continu- Specific to the core cable manufacturer
ously applied to a wire given
Temperature rating Maximum temperature insulating material Specific to the core cable manufacturer
may be used without loss to basic proper- given
ties
Notes Describe the cable's use in the MR system
Table 32 Cables installed on site
Description Number AWG Certifica- Volt- Temp Notes

of con- tion age rating
ductors rating (Cel-
(volts) sius)
Run 623, CRY to SPW, COLD 4 16 CM, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
HEAD CONTROL, LCC, 15000 is 7 inches (178 mm)
mm
Run 624, SPW to MAG, COLD 4 16 CM, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
HEAD CONTROL, LCC, 15000 is 7 inches (178 mm)
mm
Run E0003, PGR-J102 to OW- 3 10 UL AWM 600 90° Minimum bend radius
PDM-J1, Host Power, 30000 2587, FT4 is 6 inches (152 mm)
mm
Appendix
Cables installed on site continued

(volts) sius)
Run E0004 PGR-J16 to Pen-J1, 5 10 UL AWM 600 90° Minimum bend radius
Pen Power, 17000 mm 2587, FT4 is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E0004, PGR-J16 to PEN-J1, 5 10 UL AWM 600 90° Minimum bend radius
PEN Power, 10000 mm 2587, FT4 is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E0009, HEC to CRY, INPUT 4 12 LFNC 600 105° Four 12AWG wires in
POWER, SUMITOMO CSW-71D, conduit. Minimum
10000 mm bend radius is 5 inches
(127 mm)
Run E1001, PGR-J19 to SPW- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 5000 85° LMR-900 coaxial cable.
J106, 1.5 RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius
16523mm ref. aluminum braid is 9 inches (229 mm)
shield.
J106, 1.5T RF Transmit, 10327 Minimum bend radius
mm ref. aluminum braid shield. is 9 inches (229 mm)
Run E1002 SPW-J128 to PGR- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 4000 85° LMR-600 coaxial cable.
J18, RF Transmit, 10218 mm, Minimum bend radius
aluminum braid shield. is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E1002 SPW-J128 to PGR- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 4000 85° LMR-600 coaxial cable.
J18,RF Transmit, 16348 mm, Minimum bend radius
aluminum braid shield. is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E1003 PGR-J12 to PEN-J5, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1500 85° LMR-240 coaxial cable.
Body TR, 17000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2.5 inches (64 mm)
Run E1003, PGR-J12 to PEN-J5, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1500 85° LMR-240 coaxial cable.
Body TR, 10000 mm Minimum bend radius
-2.5 inches (64 mm)
Run E1004 PGR-J13 to Pen-J6, 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1500 85° LMR-240 coaxial cable.
Head TR, 10000 mm Minimum bend radius
Head TR, 17000 mm Minimum bend radius
Run E1005, PGR-J11 to PEN- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
J15, Tx Output, 10000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inches (51 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run E1005, PGR-J11 to PEN- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
J15, Tx Output, 17000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inch (51 mm)
Tx Output, 10000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inches (51 mm)
Tx Output, 17000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inch (51 mm)
J109, 1.5 RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius
16523mm ref. aluminum braid is 9 inches (229 mm)
shield.
J106, 1.5T RF Transmit, 10327 Minimum bend radius
mm ref. aluminum braid shield. is 9 inches (229 mm)
Run E1307, PGR-J300 to PEN- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
J23, 10160 mm mum bend radius is 5
(ICE only) inches (127 mm)
Run E2002 PGR-J1 to PEN-J19, 2 N/A OFNR N/A 85° Optical fibers, 2 sim-
10000 mm plex connectors bun-
(XGD only) dled on each end. Mini-
mum bend radius is
4.8 inches (122 mm)
Run E2002 PGR-J1 to PEN-J19, 2 N/A OFNR N/A 85° Optical fibers, 2 sim-
17000 mm plex connectors bun-
(XGD only) dled on each end. Mini-
mum bend radius is
4.8 inches (122 mm)
Run E2020 PGR-J22 to PEN- 6 N/A LFNC N/A 85° Optical fibers in con-
J17, 10000 mm duit, 3 connectors
bundled on each end.
Minimum bend radius
is 7 inches (178 mm)
Run E2020 PGR-J22 to PEN- 6 N/A LFNC N/A 85° Optical fibers in con-
J17, 17000 mm duit, 3 connectors
bundled on each end.
Minimum bend radius
is 7 inches (178 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run E2023 PGR-J21 to PEN- 2 N/A OFNR N/A 85° Optical fibers, 2 sim-
J18, 10000 mm plex connectors bun-
(MR450w and MR450w GEM dled on each end. Mini-
only) mum bend radius is
4.8 inches (122 mm)
Run E2023 PGR-J21 to PEN- 2 N/A OFNR N/A 85° Optical fibers, 2 sim-
J18, 17000 mm plex connectors bun-
(MR450w and MR450w GEM dled on each end. Mini-
only) mum bend radius is
4.8 inches (122 mm)
Run E3002 PGR-J103 to Pen- 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J11, 17000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3002, PGR-J103 to PEN- 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J11, E-Stop, 10000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3006 PGR-J5 to Pen-J14, 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
17000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3006, PGR-J5 to PEN-J14, 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
HART, 10000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
CAN, 10000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
CAN, 17000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
10000 mm is 3.9 inches (99 mm)
17000 mm is 3.9 inches (99 mm)
Run E3011, PGR-J2 to OW1- 8 26 CMP 300 75° Minimum bend radius
Host, Ethernet, 30000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3013, PGR-J6 to HEC- 8 26 CMP 300 75° Minimum bend radius
CAT 5, Cooling Control Ether- is 6 inches (152 mm)
net, 10000 mm
Run E3014, PGR-J20 to RF 2 22 CMG, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
Door SW, E-Stop, 25000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3015, PGR-J17 to OW- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
FJ6, E-stop, 30000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run E3017, PEN-J10 to OW- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
FJ5, E-stop, 30000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3018, PEN-J12 to OW- 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
FJ7, HART-RS422, 30000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3020 Pen-J13 to Mon- 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J10, 17000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3022,MON-J7 to SPW- 6 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J116, Instrumentation Box, is 6 inches (152 mm)
17000 mm
Run E3023 SPW-J117 to MON- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J8, 17000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3025, CRY to MON-FJ4, 10 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
Flow Monitor-Sumitomo, is 6 inches (152 mm)
10000 mm
Run E3028, HEC-PLC-RS232 to 8 26 CM, FT4 300 75° Minimum bend radius
PGR-J3, Cooling Control Com- is 6 inches (152 mm)
munication, 10000 mm
Run E3030 E-Off Switch to 2 22 CMG, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
SPW-J115, 17000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3030, SPW-J115 to E-Off 2 22 CMG, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
SW, E-off, 10000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run E3031, SPW-J118 to OW- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J7, Patient Intercom, 30000 is 6 inches (152 mm)
mm
Run E3034 MON-J5 to custom- 8 26 CMP 300 75° Minimum bend radius
er-supplied Network, 30000 is 6 inches (152 mm)
mm
Run E3037 PGR-J301 to GOC- 4 20 USB 5 165°

USB 3.0, 30000 mm
(ICE only)
Run E3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
Equip Room, Long, 17000 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run E3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
Equip Room, Short, 10000 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run E3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
1/C 6
AWG
Run E3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
1/C 6
AWG
Run E3319 Gradient Cable Z, 5 4/C 2/0 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
1/C 6
AWG
1/C 6
AWG
1/C 6
AWG
Equip Room, Short,9400 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run E4002, PEN-GND to PGR- 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor

GND, Ground Cable, 10000 mm ground cable. Mini-
mum bend radius is 5
inches (127 mm)
Run E4002, PEN-GND to PGR- 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor

GND, Ground Cable, 17000 mm ground cable. Mini-
inches (127 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run E4005 RF COM GND STUD 1 1/0 UL AWM 600 105° single conductor
to PGR-GND STUD, 10000 mm 1284, TEW ground cable. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
to PGR-GND STUD, 17000 mm 1284, TEW ground cable. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
Run E4007, HEC-GND to PGR- 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor

GND,Ground Cable, 10000 mm ground cable. Mini-
inches (127 mm)
Run E4008, OW-GOC-GND to 1 10 CMG 300 80° single conductor

PGR-GND, Ground Cable, ground cable. Mini-
30000 mm mum bend radius is 5
inches (127 mm)
to SPW-GND STUD, 2800 mm 1284, TEW ground cable. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
to PEN-GND STUD, 2800 mm 1284, TEW ground cable. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
Run M1001, SPW-J106 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 5000 85° LMR-900 coaxial cable.
MAG-HYB-J1, 1.5T RF Body Minimum bend radius
Transmit, 12394mm ref. alumi- is 9 inches (229 mm)
num braid shield.
Run M1001, SPW-J106 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 5000 85° LMR-900 coaxial cable.
MAG-HYB-J1, 1.5T RF Body Minimum bend radius
Transmit, 16525mm ref. alumi- is 9 inches (229 mm)
num braid shield.
Run M1302, PEN-J29 to MAG- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
TDM-J11, Receiver Clock, Twi- mum bend radius is 5
nax, 11000 mm inches (127 mm)
(MR450w, MR450w GEM, Artist
T)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M1302, PEN-J29 to MAG- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
TDM-J11, Receiver Clock, mum bend radius is 5
Twinax, 15000 mm inches (127 mm)
T)
Run M1302, PEN-J29 to MAG- 2 20 FT4, CMG 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
RxDist-J19, Receiver Clock, mum bend radius is 5
Twinax, 15140 mm inches (127 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1303, PEN-J32 to PED- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
HUB-SLOT11-J16, NB Exciter, Minimum bend radius
14500 mm is 2 inch (51 mm)
T)
Run M1303, PEN-J32 to PED- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
HUB-SLOT11-J16, NB Exciter, Minimum bend radius
18500 mm is 2 inch (51 mm)
T)
Run M1303 MAG-RxDist-J12 to 1 19 FT4, CMG 300 85° twinaxial cable. Mini-
PEN-J32, Loopback, 15550 mm mum bend radius is 5
(Artist and XT) inches (127 mm)
Run M1304, PEN-J30 to PED- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
HUB-SLOT11-J17, Rx LO - Ex- mum bend radius is 5
citer Reference Clock, Twinax, inches (127 mm)
13500 mm
T)
Run M1304, PEN-J30 to PED- 2 20 CL2, FT4 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
HUB-SLOT11-J17, Rx LO - Ex- mum bend radius is 5
citer Reference Clock, Twinax, inches (127 mm)
17500 mm
T)
Run M1304, PEN-J30 to MAG- 2 20 FT4, SMG 300 75° twinaxial cable. Mini-
RxDist-J10, Rx LO, Twinax, mum bend radius is 5
16330 mm) inches (127 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M1305, SPW-J122 to PED- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 4000 85° LMR-600 coaxial cable.
IO-J1, P1 port RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius
14306 mm reference, alumi- is 6 inches (152 mm)
num braid shield.
IO-J1, P1 port RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius
num braid shield.
IO-J2, A port RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius
num braid shield.
T)
IO-J2, A port RF Transmit, Minimum bend radius
num braid shield.
T
Run M1310 PEN-J72 to MAG- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
J9, 10000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1310 PEN-J72 to MAG- 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
J9, 14000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1312, DVw, Pen-J74 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-HYB-J6, 13000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1312, DVw, Pen-J74 to 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
MAG-HYB-J6, 17000 mm Minimum bend radius
is 2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1313, MAG-DDSPLIT-J20 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
to MAG-BORE-J6, DVw, 6250 Minimum bend radius
mm is 2 inches (51 mm)
Run M1314, MAG-DDSPLIT-J21 1 N/A CMR, FT4 1000 100° LMR-195 coaxial cable.
to MAG-BORE-J7, DVw, 6250 Minimum bend radius
mm is 2 inches (51 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M1315 MAG-RxDis-J11 to 1 19 FT4, UL N/A 85° LMR-195 coaxial cable.

MAG-Extended Bridge Rear Minimum bend radius
Support TNS Antenna is 2 inches (51 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1335 MAG-AMP-J11 to 1 19 FT4, UL N/A 85° LMR-195 coaxial cable.

MAG-RxDist-J13, body receive, Minimum bend radius
5000 mm is 2 inches (51 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M1366 DPP1-J10 to 2 20 N/A 750V 86° Minimum bend radius

RxDist-J5, Rx LO, 2020 mm rms is 2.5 inches (64 mm)
(Artist and XT)

RxDist-J6, Rx LO, 1830 mm rms is 2.5 inches (64 mm).
(Artist and XT)

RxDist-J7, Rx LO, 1330 mm rms is 2.5 inches (64 mm)
(Artist and XT)

RxDist-J8, 810 mm rms is 2.5 inches (64 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M2025 MAG to PEN, CAN 8 N/A LFNC N/A 85° optical fibers in con-
fiber optic, 12500 mm duit, 4 duplex connec-
tors bundled. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
Run M2025 MAG to PEN, CAN 8 N/A LFNC N/A 85° optical fibers in con-
fiber optic, 16500 mm duit, 4 duplex connec-
tors bundled. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
Run M3022, SPW-J116 to 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
MAG-P403, 14000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run M3023 SPW-J117 to Mag- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
FJ2, 14000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Run M3030, SPW-J115 to E- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
OFF, 30000 mm is 6 inches (152 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
MAG-J1, Console Intercom, is 6 inches (152 mm)
10000 mm
MAG-J1, Console Intercom, is 6 inches (152 mm)
14000 mm
Run M3300,PEN-J51 to MAG- 24 7/C CL2, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
TDM-J9, TDM Power, 24W7, 12AWG is 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Low-Mag, 11200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Low-Mag, 15200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3301, PEN-J52 to MAG- 24 7/C CL2, FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
Low-Magnetic, 11200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Low-Mag, 15200 mm + 17/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3302 PEN-J40 to MAG- 37 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
J4,SRI Power, 10000 mm is 613.0 inches (330
mm)
J4,SRI Power, 14000 mm is 613.0 inches (330
mm)
J3, MCPDB Interface, 10000 is 613.0 inches (330
mm mm)
J3, MCPDB Interface, 14000 is 613.0 inches (330
mm mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M3304 PEN-J48 to PED- 12 6/C UL AWM 300 105° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT12-J2, RFHub Power, 10AWG 2464, FT4 is 8 inches (203 mm)
13W6, 17500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3304,PEN-J48 to PED- 12 6/C UL AWM 300 105° Minimum bend radius
13W6, 13500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3306, PEN-J46 to PED- 12 6/C UL AWM 300 105° Minimum bend radius
17C5, 13500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
17C5, 17500 mm + 6/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
HUB-SLOT12-J6, RFHub Power, 10AWG 2464, FT4 is 7.3 inches (185 mm)
9C4, 13500 mm + 4/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
HUB-SLOT12-J6, RFHub Power, 10AWG 2464, FT4 is 7.3 inches (185 mm)
9W4, 17500 mm + 4/C
(SRPS only) 22AWG
Run M3309, SPW-J123 to PED- 7 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT_11-J9, Transmit is 6.8 inches (173 mm)
switch control, 13500 mm
T)
Run M3309, SPW-J123 to PED- 7 22 CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT_11-J9, Transmit is 6.8 inches (173 mm)
switch control, 17500 mm
T)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M3310 PEN-J45 to PED- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT12-J4, RF Power, is 6.8 inches (173 mm)
13500 mm
(SRPS only)
Run M3310 PEN-J45 to PED- 25 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT12-J4, RF Power, is 6.8 inches (173 mm)
17500 mm
(SRPS only)
Run M3311 PEN-J36 to PED- 6 4/C CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
MTR-J1, Long Drive Power, 14AWG is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
15500 mm + 2/C
22AWG
Run M3311 PEN-J36 to PED- 6 4/C CMG, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
MTR-J1, Long Drive Power, 14AWG is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
19500 mm + 2/C
22AWG
J6, PAC Power, 10000 mm is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
J6, PAC Power, 14000 mm is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
J5, Dock Power, 10000 mm is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
J5, Dock Power, 14000 mm is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
J2, LCD Power, 10000 mm is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3314 Pen-J42 to Mag-J2, 15 22 CL3, FT4 300 80° Minimum bend radius
14000 mm is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3315 Pen-J54 to PED- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
TIF-J4, 18500 mm. is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Run M3315, PEN-J54 to PED- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
TIF-J4 , Hall's Signal, 14500 is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
mm.
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M3316 Pen-J34 to PED- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT11-J10, 17500 mm. is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
T)
Run M3316, PEN-J34 to PED- 9 22 CL3, FT4 300 90° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT11-J10, TR_DD Un- is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
blank, 13500 mm
T)
.
Run M3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
Scan Room, Long, 14000 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3317 Gradient Cable X, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
Scan Room, Short, 10000 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3318 Gradient Cable Y, 5 4/C 1 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
Scan Room, Short, 10000 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 613.0 inches (330
1/C 6 mm)
AWG
Run M3319 Gradient Cable Z, 5 4/C 2/0 UL Type 600 90° Minimum bend radius
1/C 6
AWG
Scan Room, Short, 10000 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3367 MAG-DPP1-J7 to 44 24 UL AWM 30 80° Minimum bend radius

MAG-RxDist-J4, 1250 mm 2919, 22P- is 7.9 inches (201 mm)
(Artist and XT) MAEB
Appendix

(volts) sius)


Run M3375 PEN-J112 to PED- 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT12-J1, RFHub Power, is 8.3 inches (211 mm)
13500 mm
(MR450w and MR450w GEM
with eSRPS and Artist T only)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to PED- 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
HUB-SLOT12-J1, RFHub Power, is 8.3 inches (211 mm)
17500 mm
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to MAG- 24 22 FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
RxDist-J1, RxDist Power 24W7, is 8.3 inches (211 mm)
13500 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3376 PED-HUB-SLOT12- 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
J3 to MAG-TDM-J10 is 8.3 inches (211 mm)
Run M3377 PED-HUB-SLOT12- 24 22/12 CSA FT4 300 105° Minimum bend radius
J2 to MAG-TDM-J9 is 8.3 inches (211 mm)
J50, Enclosure LED Power, is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Long, 14000 mm
J50, Enclosure LED Power, is 6.0 inches (152 mm)
Short, 10000 mm
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M3380 MAG-RxDist-J58 to 4 22 UL 1007 300 85° Minimum bend radius

DTRSW-J20, MAG-Bore-J9, CSA TR64 is 3.5 inches (152 mm)
MAG-Preamp-J9, HART ID
cable
(Artist and XT)
1/C 6
AWG
Scan Room, Short,8700 mm AWG + TC-ER, FT4 is 13 inches (330 mm)
1/C 6
AWG
Run M3470 MAG-DPP4-J7 to 44 24 UL 2919, 30 80° Minimum bend radius

MAG-RxDist-J22, 1200 mm 22P-MAEB is 7.9 inches (201 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M4005 RF COM GND STUD 1 1/0 UL AWM 600 105° single conductor
to MAG-GND STUD, 13500 mm 1284, TEW ground cable. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
Run M4005 RF COM GND STUD 1 1/0 UL AWM 600 105° single conductor
to MAG-GND STUD, 17500 mm 1284, TEW ground cable. Mini-
inches (178 mm)
Run P2003 PGR-J15 to Mag- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
J20, 31000 mm connectors bundled on
(MR450w and MR450w GEM) each end. Minimum
bend radius is 5.7 in-
ches (145 mm)
Run P2003 ICE-J31/J32 to Re- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
ceiver 1-J4, Receiver 2-J4, connectors bundled on
20000 mm each end. Minimum
(Artist T) bend radius is 3.78 in-
ches (96 mm)
Run P2003 ICE-J31/J32 to Re- 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
ceiver 1-J4, Receiver 2-J4, connectors bundled on
(Artist T) bend radius is 3.78 in-
ches (96 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run P2003 ICE-J1/J2/J5 to 6 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 3 duplex
DPP1-J6/J9 and DPP2-J6, connectors bundled on
(Artist and XT) bend radius is 3.78 in-
ches (96 mm)
J21,20000 mm connectors bundled on
ches (145 mm)
J21, 31000 mm connectors bundled on
ches (145 mm)
DPP2-J9 and DPP3-J6/J9, connectors bundled on
ches (96 mm)
DPP2-J9 and DPP3-J6/J9, connectors bundled on
ches (96 mm)
DPP4-J6/J9 and Rx Distribution connectors bundled on
J16, 20000 mm each end. Minimum
ches (96 mm)
DPP4-J6/J9 and Rx Distribution connectors bundled on
J16, 27000 mm each end. Minimum
ches (96 mm)
Run P2026 OW to Mag- 4 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 2 duplex
J11,Scan Room Display,40000 connectors bundled on
mm each end. Minimum
ches (122 mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run P2026 OW to Mag- 4 N/A OFNR N/A 85° optical fibers, 2 duplex
J11,Scan Room Display,44000 connectors bundled on
mm each end. Minimum
ches (122 mm)
Run M3316 MEMS Inhibit Ca- 15 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius
ble, Rx Distribution-J18 to is 3.9 inches (100 mm)
PEN-J56, 10000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3316 MEMS Inhibit Ca- 15 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius
ble, Rx Distribution-J18 to is 3.9 inches (100 mm)
PEN-J56, 17000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3392 MEMS Pport Power 1 38 - - 200° Coaxial RF cable. Mini-

Cable, PEN-J57 to MAG I/O, mum bend radius 1.5
10000 mm inches (38 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M3392 MEMS Pport Power 1 38 - - 200° Coaxial RF cable. Mini-

Cable, PEN-J57 to MAG I/O, mum bend radius 1.5
17000 mm inches (38 mm)
(Artist and XT)
Run M3391 ICE Diagnostic Ca- 25 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius
ble, PEN-J55 to Rx Distribu- 5.0 inches (127 mm)
tion-J14, 10000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3391 ICE Diagnostic Ca- 25 22 FT1 300 85° Minimum bend radius
ble, PEN-J55 to Rx Distribu- 5.0 inches (127 mm)
tion-J14, 17000 mm
(Artist and XT)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to Rx 24 22 FT4 300 105° Composite RF and sig-

Distribution-J1, Rx Distribution nal. Minimum bend ra-
Power 24W7, 13500 mm dius 8.3 inches (211
(Artist and XT) mm)
Appendix

(volts) sius)
Run M3375 PEN-J112 to Rx 24 22 FT4 300 105° Composite RF and sig-

Distribution-J1, Rx Distribution nal. Minimum bend ra-
Power 24W7, 17500 mm dius 8.3 inches (211
(Artist and XT) mm)
Cable Table Interface 12/8 22 FT4 300 80° Y-cable. Minimum

(Artist and XT) bend radius 3.5/2.6 in-
ches (89/66 mm)
Appendix
Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA Artist

Installation Manual Artist

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual Artist

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Optima MR450w, MR450w GEM, and SIGNA

ПРЕДУПРЕЖ Това упътване за работа е налично само на английски език.

UPOZOR- Ovaj servisni priručnik dostupan je na engleskom jeziku.

ADVARSEL Denne servicemanual findes kun på engelsk.

WAAR- Deze onderhoudshandleiding is enkel in het Engels verkrijgbaar.

WARNING This service manual is available in English only.

HOIATUS See teenindusjuhend on saadaval ainult inglise keeles.

ATTENTION Ce manuel d'installation et de maintenance est disponible uniquement en anglais.

WARNUNG Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.

ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟ Τοπαρόν εγχειρίδιο σέρβις διατίθεται στα αγγλικά μόνο.

FIGYELMEZ- Ezen karbantartási kézikönyv kizárólag angol nyelven érhető el.

AVVERTEN- Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in lingua inglese.

경고 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다.

BRĪDINĀ- Šī apkopes rokasgrāmata ir pieejama tikai angļu valodā.

ADVARSEL Denne servicehåndboken finnes bare på engelsk.

OSTRZEŻE- Niniejszy podręcznik serwisowy dostępny jest jedynie w języku angielskim.

ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica encontra-se disponível unicamente em inglês.

ATENÇÃO Este manual de assistência técnica só se encontra disponível em inglês.

ОСТОРОЖН Данное руководство по техническому обслуживанию представлено только на английском

UPOZOR- Ovo servisno uputstvo je dostupno samo na engleskom jeziku.

UPOZORNE- Tento návod na obsluhu je k dispozícii len v angličtine.

ATENCION Este manual de servicio sólo existe en inglés.

OPOZORILO Ta servisni priročnik je na voljo samo v angleškem jeziku.

DİKKAT Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur.

ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕ Даний посібник з експлуатації доступний тільки англійською мовою.

(MRIhc50341). Added to instruction for applying teflon tape to fittings connecting

8.0 September 12, Added SMART installation pages.

IDENTIFIER LOC ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING RATE NOTES

EC01 Chapter 6 Cable and According to Up- NA NA

EC02 Chapter 8 Final En- According to Up- NA NA

Chapter 2 SMART Installation for IPM Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Chapter 4 Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Chapter 5 PGR Cabinet PDU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 6 Cable and System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Chapter 7 Final Enclosure Installation for MR450w . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Chapter 9 Operator Workspace Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Chapter 10 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Chapter 11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Chapter 1 SMART Installation

1.1 SMART installation

1.1.2 Project coordination

1.1.3 Site readiness process

Site readiness to enable SMART requires:

1.1.4 Field service tasks

• Full understanding of the time required to complete each task

• Equipment delivery – fill HEC coolant

1.1.5 SMART install timeline

The key to SMART installation is:

1.2 SMART installation overview

Site Readiness NOTE: Timeline does

Day 1–5 Mechanical Installation

Day 6–7 Pre-Ramp Install

Magnet Ramping System Power Up

Day 8–9 Settling Time/Pressure Cals/Shim Prep Table/Bridge Adjustments &

Day 10 Drift Test/Passive Shimming

Day 11– Calibrations

Support Day 1–2 Additional Support Tasks

Figure 1 Smart Installation Overview for IPM Magnet

1.3 Service documentation

5500097 Pre-Magnet Delivery System Instructions to install:

1.4 Site readiness

Equipment room HEC power complete